Mercurial > vim
diff runtime/doc/syntax.txt @ 32670:695b50472e85
Fix line endings issue
| author | Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org> |
|---|---|
| date | Mon, 26 Jun 2023 13:13:12 +0200 |
| parents | 448aef880252 |
| children | dcab5385dd02 |
line wrap: on
line diff
--- a/runtime/doc/syntax.txt +++ b/runtime/doc/syntax.txt @@ -1,5970 +1,5970 @@ -*syntax.txt* For Vim version 9.0. Last change: 2023 Apr 24 - - - VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar - - -Syntax highlighting *syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring* - -Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or -color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim -doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its -limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody -calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that. - -Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary -terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the -GUI version, gvim. - -In the User Manual: -|usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting. -|usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file. - -1. Quick start |:syn-qstart| -2. Syntax files |:syn-files| -3. Syntax loading procedure |syntax-loading| -4. Converting to HTML |2html.vim| -5. Syntax file remarks |:syn-file-remarks| -6. Defining a syntax |:syn-define| -7. :syntax arguments |:syn-arguments| -8. Syntax patterns |:syn-pattern| -9. Syntax clusters |:syn-cluster| -10. Including syntax files |:syn-include| -11. Synchronizing |:syn-sync| -12. Listing syntax items |:syntax| -13. Colorschemes |color-schemes| -14. Highlight command |:highlight| -15. Linking groups |:highlight-link| -16. Cleaning up |:syn-clear| -17. Highlighting tags |tag-highlight| -18. Window-local syntax |:ownsyntax| -19. Color xterms |xterm-color| -20. When syntax is slow |:syntime| - -{Vi does not have any of these commands} - -Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been -disabled at compile time. - -============================================================================== -1. Quick start *:syn-qstart* - - *:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable* -This command switches on syntax highlighting: > - - :syntax enable - -What this command actually does is to execute the command > - :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim - -If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find -the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|). Usually this works just -fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the -directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files -are in the "/usr/vim/vim82/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to -"/usr/vim/vim82". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim. -This command also sources the |menu.vim| script when the GUI is running or -will start soon. See |'go-M'| about avoiding that. - - *:syn-on* *:syntax-on* -The `:syntax enable` command will keep most of your current color settings. -This allows using `:highlight` commands to set your preferred colors before or -after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the -defaults, use: > - :syntax on -< - *:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal* -If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background -with: > - :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White -For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|. -For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|. - -NOTE: The syntax files on MS-Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>. -The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of -file for your system. Although on MS-Windows the right format is -automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty. - -NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value -of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after -reading the |gvimrc|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be -used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on -highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: > - - :gui " open window and set default for 'background' - :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors - -NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the -foreground! Use ":gui -f" then. - - *g:syntax_on* -You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command: > - :if exists("g:syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif - -To put this into a mapping, you can use: > - :map <F7> :if exists("g:syntax_on") <Bar> - \ syntax off <Bar> - \ else <Bar> - \ syntax enable <Bar> - \ endif <CR> -[using the |<>| notation, type this literally] - -Details: -The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how -this works, look in the file: - command file ~ - :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim - :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim - :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim - :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim -Also see |syntax-loading|. - -NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting -makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value. - -============================================================================== -2. Syntax files *:syn-files* - -The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in -a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the -name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters, -a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem). -Examples: - c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim - cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim - -The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But -the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a -language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one, -for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: > - :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim - -The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: > - :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim - :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim -These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim. - - -MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES *mysyntaxfile* - -When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these -automatically with ":syntax enable", do this: - -1. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item - of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: > - mkdir ~/.vim - -2. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: > - mkdir ~/.vim/syntax - -3. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write - it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: > - :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim - -Now you can start using your syntax file manually: > - :set syntax=mine -You don't have to exit Vim to use this. - -If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|. - -If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user -to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'. - - -ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-add* - -If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to -add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps: - -1. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above. - -2. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: > - mkdir ~/.vim/after - mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax - -3. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For - example, to change the colors for the C syntax: > - highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green - -4. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the - syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: > - :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim - -That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be -different. You don't even have to restart Vim. - -If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name. -All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example: - ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim - ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim - - -REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-replace* - -If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new -version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above. Just make sure -that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'. -Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets -b:current_syntax. - - -NAMING CONVENTIONS *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18* - -A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of -thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color. -A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself. - -The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits -and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*". However, Vim does not give -an error when using other characters. The maximum length of a group name is -about 200 bytes. *E1249* - -To be able to allow each user to pick their favorite set of colors, there must -be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages. -These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly -you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"): - - *Comment any comment - - *Constant any constant - String a string constant: "this is a string" - Character a character constant: 'c', '\n' - Number a number constant: 234, 0xff - Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false - Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10 - - *Identifier any variable name - Function function name (also: methods for classes) - - *Statement any statement - Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc. - Repeat for, do, while, etc. - Label case, default, etc. - Operator "sizeof", "+", "*", etc. - Keyword any other keyword - Exception try, catch, throw - - *PreProc generic Preprocessor - Include preprocessor #include - Define preprocessor #define - Macro same as Define - PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc. - - *Type int, long, char, etc. - StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc. - Structure struct, union, enum, etc. - Typedef A typedef - - *Special any special symbol - SpecialChar special character in a constant - Tag you can use CTRL-] on this - Delimiter character that needs attention - SpecialComment special things inside a comment - Debug debugging statements - - *Underlined text that stands out, HTML links - - *Ignore left blank, hidden |hl-Ignore| - - *Error any erroneous construct - - *Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the - keywords TODO FIXME and XXX - -The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups. -For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting. -The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same -highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands -after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file. - -Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string" -can be used for the same group. - -The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name: - NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained - - *hl-Ignore* -When using the Ignore group, you may also consider using the conceal -mechanism. See |conceal|. - -============================================================================== -3. Syntax loading procedure *syntax-loading* - -This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is -issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are -located. This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|. - -":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following: - - Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim - | - +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim - | - +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath' - | | - | +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is - | | defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise - | | ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules - | | existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't - | | set yet. - | | - | +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when - | | the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1* - | | - | +- Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable. - | This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2* - | - +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any - | filetype.vim files found. It should always Source - | $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following. - | | - | +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option - | | This is where the connection between file name and file type is - | | made for known file types. *synload-3* - | | - | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile* - | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. - | | *synload-4* - | | - | +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file - | | type was detected yet. *synload-5* - | | - | +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim| - | - +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file - | type has been detected. *synload-6* - | - +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each - already loaded buffer. - - -Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows: - - Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands. - | - +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from |synload-3| - | (known file types) or |synload-4| (user's file types), the 'filetype' - | option is set to the file type. - | - +- The autocommand at |synload-5| is triggered. If the file type was not - | found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This - | should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following. - | | - | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myscriptsfile* - | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. - | | - | +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file, - | again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the - | file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'. - | - +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this - | triggers the FileType autocommand |synload-6| above. It sets - | 'syntax' to the determined file type. - | - +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand - | from |synload-1| (and |synload-2|). This find the main syntax file in - | 'runtimepath', with this command: - | runtime! syntax/<name>.vim - | - +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are - triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific - syntax. - -============================================================================== -4. Conversion to HTML *2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML* - -2html is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current -window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file. - -After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The -colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. With -|g:html_line_ids| you can jump to specific lines by adding (for example) #L123 -or #123 to the end of the URL in your browser's address bar. And with -|g:html_dynamic_folds| enabled, you can show or hide the text that is folded -in Vim. - -You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"! -Source the script to convert the current file: > - - :runtime! syntax/2html.vim -< -Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off -options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to -the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using -|:unlet|. - -Remarks: -- Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors. -- From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)! -- The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some - features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be - incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in. - -Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a -Unix shell: > - for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done -< - *g:html_start_line* *g:html_end_line* -To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml| -command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first -and last line to be converted. Example, using the last set Visual area: > - - :let g:html_start_line = line("'<") - :let g:html_end_line = line("'>") - :runtime! syntax/2html.vim -< - *:TOhtml* -:[range]TOhtml The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin. - This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a - range is given, this command sets |g:html_start_line| - and |g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the - range, respectively. Default range is the entire - buffer. - - If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless - |g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert - all windows which are part of the diff in the current - tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element - in the generated HTML. With |g:html_line_ids| you can - jump to lines in specific windows with (for example) - #W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or - #W3L87 for line 87 in the third. - - Examples: > - - :10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html - :'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection - :TOhtml " convert entire buffer -< - *g:html_diff_one_file* -Default: 0. -When 0, and using |:TOhtml| all windows involved in a |diff| in the current tab -page are converted to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element. When -1, only the current buffer is converted. -Example: > - - let g:html_diff_one_file = 1 -< - *g:html_whole_filler* -Default: 0. -When 0, if |g:html_diff_one_file| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines -is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number -of inserted lines. -When 1, always display all inserted lines as if |g:html_diff_one_file| were -not set. -> - :let g:html_whole_filler = 1 -< - *TOhtml-performance* *g:html_no_progress* -Default: 0. -When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the -2html.vim conversion process. -When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement -but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big -files it can take a long time! -Example: > - - let g:html_no_progress = 1 -< -You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not -run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script -moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: > - - vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c -< -Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you -need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML -conversion. See |-E| and |-s-ex| for details. It is probably best to create a -script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of -specifying each command separately. - - *hl-TOhtmlProgress* *TOhtml-progress-color* -When displayed, the progress bar will show colored boxes along the statusline -as the HTML conversion proceeds. By default, the background color as the -current "DiffDelete" highlight group is used. If "DiffDelete" and "StatusLine" -have the same background color, TOhtml will automatically adjust the color to -differ. If you do not like the automatically selected colors, you can define -your own highlight colors for the progress bar. Example: > - - hi TOhtmlProgress guifg=#c0ffee ctermbg=7 -< - *g:html_number_lines* -Default: Current 'number' setting. -When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering. -When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same -highlighting as the line number column in Vim (|hl-LineNr|). -Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: > - :let g:html_number_lines = 1 -Force to omit the line numbers: > - :let g:html_number_lines = 0 -Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: > - :unlet g:html_number_lines -< - *g:html_line_ids* -Default: 1 if |g:html_number_lines| is set, 0 otherwise. -When 1, adds an HTML id attribute to each line number, or to an empty <span> -inserted for that purpose if no line numbers are shown. This ID attribute -takes the form of L123 for single-buffer HTML pages, or W2L123 for diff-view -pages, and is used to jump to a specific line (in a specific window of a diff -view). Javascript is inserted to open any closed dynamic folds -(|g:html_dynamic_folds|) containing the specified line before jumping. The -javascript also allows omitting the window ID in the url, and the leading L. -For example: > - - page.html#L123 jumps to line 123 in a single-buffer file - page.html#123 does the same - - diff.html#W1L42 jumps to line 42 in the first window in a diff - diff.html#42 does the same -< - *g:html_use_css* -Default: 1. -When 1, generate valid HTML 5 markup with CSS styling, supported in all modern -browsers and many old browsers. -When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not -recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients, -forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable. -Example: > - :let g:html_use_css = 0 -< - *g:html_ignore_conceal* -Default: 0. -When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character -from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current -value of 'conceallevel'. -When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is -|conceal|ed. - -Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is -included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): > - :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1 - :setl conceallevel=0 -< - *g:html_ignore_folding* -Default: 0. -When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in -Vim (|fold-foldtext|). See |g:html_dynamic_folds| if you also want to allow -the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside. -When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the -text is in a fold has no impact at all. |g:html_dynamic_folds| has no effect. - -Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included -in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): > - zR - :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1 -< - *g:html_dynamic_folds* -Default: 0. -When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML. -When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like -in Vim. - -Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling, -regardless of what |g:html_use_css| is set to. - -This variable is ignored when |g:html_ignore_folding| is set. -> - :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1 -< - *g:html_no_foldcolumn* -Default: 0. -When 0, if |g:html_dynamic_folds| is 1, generate a column of text similar to -Vim's foldcolumn (|fold-foldcolumn|) the user can click on to toggle folds -open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current -'foldcolumn' setting. -When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over -folded text will open the fold as if |g:html_hover_unfold| were set. -> - :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1 -< - *TOhtml-uncopyable-text* *g:html_prevent_copy* -Default: Empty string. -This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied, -when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful -for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or -line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be -affected in this way as follows: - f: fold column - n: line numbers (also within fold text) - t: fold text - d: diff filler - -Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: > - :let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn" -< -The method used to prevent copying in the generated page depends on the value -of |g:html_use_input_for_pc|. - - *g:html_use_input_for_pc* -Default: "fallback" -If |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty, then: - -When "all", read-only <input> elements are used in place of normal text for -uncopyable regions. In some browsers, especially older browsers, after -selecting an entire page and copying the selection, the <input> tags are not -pasted with the page text. If |g:html_no_invalid| is 0, the <input> tags have -invalid type; this works in more browsers, but the page will not validate. -Note: This method does NOT work in recent versions of Chrome and equivalent -browsers; the <input> tags get pasted with the text. - -When "fallback" (default value), the same <input> elements are generated for -older browsers, but newer browsers (detected by CSS feature query) hide the -<input> elements and instead use generated content in an ::before pseudoelement -to display the uncopyable text. This method should work with the largest -number of browsers, both old and new. - -When "none", the <input> elements are not generated at all. Only the -generated-content method is used. This means that old browsers, notably -Internet Explorer, will either copy the text intended not to be copyable, or -the non-copyable text may not appear at all. However, this is the most -standards-based method, and there will be much less markup. - - *g:html_no_invalid* -Default: 0. -When 0, if |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty and |g:html_use_input_for_pc| is -not "none", an invalid attribute is intentionally inserted into the <input> -element for the uncopyable areas. This prevents pasting the <input> elements -in some applications. Specifically, some versions of Microsoft Word will not -paste the <input> elements if they contain this invalid attribute. When 1, no -invalid markup is inserted, and the generated page should validate. However, -<input> elements may be pasted into some applications and can be difficult to -remove afterward. - - *g:html_hover_unfold* -Default: 0. -When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with -|g:html_dynamic_folds| set, is to click on the generated fold column. -When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse -cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with -disabled javascript to view the folded text. - -Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this -feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the -normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but -they will not be openable without a foldcolumn. -> - :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1 -< - *g:html_id_expr* -Default: "" -Dynamic folding and jumping to line IDs rely on unique IDs within the document -to work. If generated HTML is copied into a larger document, these IDs are no -longer guaranteed to be unique. Set g:html_id_expr to an expression Vim can -evaluate to get a unique string to append to each ID used in a given document, -so that the full IDs will be unique even when combined with other content in a -larger HTML document. Example, to append _ and the buffer number to each ID: > - - :let g:html_id_expr = '"_" .. bufnr("%")' -< -To append a string "_mystring" to the end of each ID: > - - :let g:html_id_expr = '"_mystring"' -< -Note: When converting a diff view to HTML, the expression will only be -evaluated for the first window in the diff, and the result used for all the -windows. - - *TOhtml-wrap-text* *g:html_pre_wrap* -Default: Current 'wrap' setting. -When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does -not wrap at the edge of the browser window. -When 1, if |g:html_use_css| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is -used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser -window. -Explicitly enable text wrapping: > - :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1 -Explicitly disable wrapping: > - :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0 -Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: > - :unlet g:html_pre_wrap -< - *g:html_no_pre* -Default: 0. -When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre> -tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab -characters can be included literally (see |g:html_expand_tabs|). -When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is -used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of character -references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow -text in the generated HTML is wrap (see |g:html_pre_wrap|) which also works in -old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and -the rendered page generated by 2html.vim. -> - :let g:html_no_pre = 1 -< - *g:html_no_doc* -Default: 0. -When 1 it doesn't generate a full HTML document with a DOCTYPE, <head>, -<body>, etc. If |g:html_use_css| is enabled (the default) you'll have to -define the CSS manually. The |g:html_dynamic_folds| and |g:html_line_ids| -settings (off by default) also insert some JavaScript. - - - *g:html_no_links* -Default: 0. -Don't generate <a> tags for text that looks like an URL. - - *g:html_no_modeline* -Default: 0. -Don't generate a modeline disabling folding. - - *g:html_expand_tabs* -Default: 0 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, 'vartabstop' is not in use, - and no fold column or line numbers occur in the generated HTML; - 1 otherwise. -When 1, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate -number of space characters, or references if |g:html_no_pre| is 1. -When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text -are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to -allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in -the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and -indentation in the HTML, unless set by default. - -Force |2html.vim| to keep <Tab> characters: > - :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0 -< -Force tabs to be expanded: > - :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1 -< - *TOhtml-encoding-detect* *TOhtml-encoding* -It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with -|g:html_use_encoding| for any content which will be placed on a web server. - -If you do not specify an encoding, |2html.vim| uses the preferred IANA name -for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not. -'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be -set to match the chosen document encoding. - -Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in -|encoding-names|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with -wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific -encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options -below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names. - -Note: By default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in -the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C: - - http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings - http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark - - *g:html_use_encoding* -Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above. -To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the -name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to -something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a -webserver: > - :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8" -You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset -entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): > - :let g:html_use_encoding = "" -To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the |g:html_use_encoding| -variable: > - :unlet g:html_use_encoding -< - *g:html_encoding_override* -Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings - mentioned by name at |encoding-names|. -This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you -specify an encoding with |g:html_use_encoding| which is not in the default -list of conversions. - -This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing -pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs. - -Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": > - :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'} -< - *g:html_charset_override* -Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings - mentioned by name at |encoding-names| and which have wide - browser support. -This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the HTML charset for any -'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also -use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example, -TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16 -and UTF-32 instead, use: > - :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'} - -Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known -compatibility problems with some major browsers. - - *g:html_font* -Default: "monospace" -You can specify the font or fonts used in the converted document using -g:html_font. If this option is set to a string, then the value will be -surrounded with single quotes. If this option is set to a list then each list -item is surrounded by single quotes and the list is joined with commas. Either -way, "monospace" is added as the fallback generic family name and the entire -result used as the font family (using CSS) or font face (if not using CSS). -Examples: > - - " font-family: 'Consolas', monospace; - :let g:html_font = "Consolas" - - " font-family: 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Consolas', monospace; - :let g:html_font = ["DejaVu Sans Mono", "Consolas"] -< - *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml* -Default: 0. -When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible). -When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML). -> - :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1 -< -============================================================================== -5. Syntax file remarks *:syn-file-remarks* - - *b:current_syntax-variable* -Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the -"b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other -settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: > - :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh" - :au BufReadPost * do-some-things - :au BufReadPost * endif - - - -ABEL *abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax* - -ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign -any value to the respective variable. Example: > - :let abel_obsolete_ok=1 -To disable them use ":unlet". Example: > - :unlet abel_obsolete_ok - -Variable Highlight ~ -abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors -abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader - - -ADA - -See |ft-ada-syntax| - - -ANT *ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax* - -The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python -by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed -by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument -and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: > - - :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim') - -will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code > - - <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[ - # everything inside is highlighted as perl - ]]></script> - -See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently. - - -APACHE *apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax* - -The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting for Apache HTTP server -version 2.2.3. - - - *asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k* -ASSEMBLY *ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax* - *ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim* - -Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection -doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your -startup vimrc: > - :let filetype_i = "asm" -Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use. - -There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name -extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a -line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax -files are included: - asm GNU assembly (the default) - asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly - asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly - ia64 Intel Itanium 64 - fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net) - masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86) - nasm Netwide assembly - tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and - MMX) - pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84) - -The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: > - asmsyntax=nasm -Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be -one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be -immediately before or after this text. Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is -equivalent to setting ft=foo in a |modeline|, and that in case of a conflict -between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in -particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax -highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax). - -The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the -b:asmsyntax variable: > - :let b:asmsyntax = "nasm" - -If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of -the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly -language: > - :let asmsyntax = "nasm" - -As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used. - - -Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~ - -To enable a feature: > - :let {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm -To disable a feature: > - :unlet {variable} |set syntax=nasm - -Variable Highlight ~ -nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error - (parser dependent; not recommended) -nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error -nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo - - -ASPPERL and ASPVBS *ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax* - -*.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's -hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are -using. For Perl script use: > - :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl" - :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl" -For Visual Basic use: > - :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs" - :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs" - - -BAAN *baan.vim* *baan-syntax* - -The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV up to SSA ERP LN -for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants -are supported. - -Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify -in ones |.vimrc|: > - let baan_code_stds=1 - -*baan-folding* - -Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables -mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on -source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive. - -To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: > - let baan_fold=1 -Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The -indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not -considered equal to a tab). > - let baan_fold_block=1 -Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO, -SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to -match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). > - let baan_fold_sql=1 -Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set| -the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in -.../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: > - set foldminlines=5 - set foldnestmax=6 - - -BASIC *basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax* - -Both Visual Basic and "normal" BASIC use the extension ".bas". To detect -which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first -five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic", -otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual -Basic. - -If the automatic detection doesn't work for you or you only edit, for -example, FreeBASIC files, use this in your startup vimrc: > - :let filetype_bas = "freebasic" - - -C *c.vim* *ft-c-syntax* - -A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value -(including zero) to the respective variable. Example: > - :let c_comment_strings = 1 - :let c_no_bracket_error = 0 -To disable them use `:unlet`. Example: > - :unlet c_comment_strings -Setting the value to zero doesn't work! - -An alternative is to switch to the C++ highlighting: > - :set filetype=cpp - -Variable Highlight ~ -*c_gnu* GNU gcc specific items -*c_comment_strings* strings and numbers inside a comment -*c_space_errors* trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab> -*c_no_trail_space_error* ... but no trailing spaces -*c_no_tab_space_error* ... but no spaces before a <Tab> -*c_no_bracket_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors -*c_no_curly_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors; - except { and } in first column - Default is to highlight them, otherwise you - can't spot a missing ")". -*c_curly_error* highlight a missing } by finding all pairs; this - forces syncing from the start of the file, can be slow -*c_no_ansi* don't do standard ANSI types and constants -*c_ansi_typedefs* ... but do standard ANSI types -*c_ansi_constants* ... but do standard ANSI constants -*c_no_utf* don't highlight \u and \U in strings -*c_syntax_for_h* for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc - syntax instead of objcpp -*c_no_if0* don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments -*c_no_cformat* don't highlight %-formats in strings -*c_no_c99* don't highlight C99 standard items -*c_no_c11* don't highlight C11 standard items -*c_no_bsd* don't highlight BSD specific types - -When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will -become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: > - :let c_no_comment_fold = 1 -"#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: > - :let c_no_if0_fold = 1 - -If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed -when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable -to a larger number: > - :let c_minlines = 100 -This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first -displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The -disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow. - -When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only -works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If -you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly. - -To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster. -Example: > - :au Syntax c call MyCadd() - :function MyCadd() - : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni - : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem - : hi link cMyItem Title - :endfun - -ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes -"NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is -not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant -highlighting: > - :hi link cConstant NONE - -If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the -highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket. - -If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file -in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be -~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. > - syn sync fromstart - set foldmethod=syntax - -CH *ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax* - -C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon -the C syntax file. See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C. - -By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead -of C or C++: > - :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1 - - -CHILL *chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax* - -Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See |c.vim| for all the settings -that are available. Additionally there is: - -chill_space_errors like c_space_errors -chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings -chill_minlines like c_minlines - - -CHANGELOG *changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax* - -ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line. -If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: > - let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0 -This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use -"b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax -file). - -You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: > - :hi link ChangelogError Error -Or to avoid the highlighting: > - :hi link ChangelogError NONE -This works immediately. - - -CLOJURE *ft-clojure-syntax* - - *g:clojure_syntax_keywords* - -Syntax highlighting of public vars in "clojure.core" is provided by default, -but additional symbols can be highlighted by adding them to the -|g:clojure_syntax_keywords| variable. The value should be a |Dictionary| of -syntax group names, each containing a |List| of identifiers. -> - let g:clojure_syntax_keywords = { - \ 'clojureMacro': ["defproject", "defcustom"], - \ 'clojureFunc': ["string/join", "string/replace"] - \ } -< -Refer to the Clojure syntax script for valid syntax group names. - -There is also *b:clojure_syntax_keywords* which is a buffer-local variant of -this variable intended for use by plugin authors to highlight symbols -dynamically. - -By setting the *b:clojure_syntax_without_core_keywords* variable, vars from -"clojure.core" will not be highlighted by default. This is useful for -namespaces that have set `(:refer-clojure :only [])` - - - *g:clojure_fold* - -Setting |g:clojure_fold| to `1` will enable the folding of Clojure code. Any -list, vector or map that extends over more than one line can be folded using -the standard Vim |fold-commands|. - - - *g:clojure_discard_macro* - -Set this variable to `1` to enable basic highlighting of Clojure's "discard -reader macro". -> - #_(defn foo [x] - (println x)) -< -Note that this option will not correctly highlight stacked discard macros -(e.g. `#_#_`). - - -COBOL *cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax* - -COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh -development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance -versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting, -add this line to your .vimrc: > - :let cobol_legacy_code = 1 -To disable it again, use this: > - :unlet cobol_legacy_code - - -COLD FUSION *coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax* - -The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion -comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > - - :let html_wrong_comments = 1 - -The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file. - - -CPP *cpp.vim* *ft-cpp-syntax* - -Most things are the same as |ft-c-syntax|. - -Variable Highlight ~ -cpp_no_cpp11 don't highlight C++11 standard items -cpp_no_cpp14 don't highlight C++14 standard items -cpp_no_cpp17 don't highlight C++17 standard items -cpp_no_cpp20 don't highlight C++20 standard items - - -CSH *csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax* - -This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually -used. - -Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems -symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish -between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the -"filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: *g:filetype_csh* -> - :let g:filetype_csh = "csh" - -For using tcsh: > - - :let g:filetype_csh = "tcsh" - -Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc, -tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts -will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the -"filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the -variable. - - -CYNLIB *cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax* - -Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable -hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc -or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a -normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this -line to your .vimrc file: > - - :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1 - -Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) > - - :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1 - -To disable these again, use this: > - - :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc - :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp -< - -CWEB *cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax* - -Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection -doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your -startup vimrc: > - :let filetype_w = "cweb" - - -DART *dart.vim* *ft-dart-syntax* - -Dart is an object-oriented, typed, class defined, garbage collected language -used for developing mobile, desktop, web, and back-end applications. Dart uses -a C-like syntax derived from C, Java, and JavaScript, with features adopted -from Smalltalk, Python, Ruby, and others. - -More information about the language and its development environment at the -official Dart language website at https://dart.dev - -dart.vim syntax detects and highlights Dart statements, reserved words, -type declarations, storage classes, conditionals, loops, interpolated values, -and comments. There is no support idioms from Flutter or any other Dart -framework. - -Changes, fixes? Submit an issue or pull request via: - -https://github.com/pr3d4t0r/dart-vim-syntax/ - - -DESKTOP *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax* - -Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files -according to freedesktop.org standard: -https://specifications.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/ -To highlight nonstandard extensions that does not begin with X-, set > - let g:desktop_enable_nonstd = 1 -Note that this may cause wrong highlight. -To highlight KDE-reserved features, set > - let g:desktop_enable_kde = 1 -g:desktop_enable_kde follows g:desktop_enable_nonstd if not supplied - - -DIFF *diff.vim* - -The diff highlighting normally finds translated headers. This can be slow if -there are very long lines in the file. To disable translations: > - - :let diff_translations = 0 - -Also see |diff-slow|. - - -DIRCOLORS *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax* - -The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to -provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of -the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most -versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and -uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following -line to your startup file: > - let dircolors_is_slackware = 1 - - -DOCBOOK *docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook* -DOCBOOK XML *docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax* -DOCBOOK SGML *docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax* - -There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you -are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you -automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type -defaults to XML. -You can set the type manually: > - :let docbk_type = "sgml" -or: > - :let docbk_type = "xml" -You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated. -Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": > - :set filetype=docbksgml -or: > - :set filetype=docbkxml - -You can specify the DocBook version: > - :let docbk_ver = 3 -When not set 4 is used. - - -DOSBATCH *dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax* - -Select the set of Windows Command interpreter extensions that should be -supported with the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For versions of Windows -NT (before Windows 2000) this should have the value of 1. For Windows 2000 -and later it should be 2. -Select the version you want with the following line: > - - :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1 - -If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support -Windows 2000 and later. - -The original MS-DOS supports an idiom of using a double colon (::) as an -alternative way to enter a comment line. This idiom can be used with the -current Windows Command Interpreter, but it can lead to problems when used -inside ( ... ) command blocks. You can find a discussion about this on -Stack Overflow - - -https://stackoverflow.com/questions/12407800/which-comment-style-should-i-use-in-batch-files - -To allow the use of the :: idiom for comments in the Windows Command -Interpreter or working with MS-DOS bat files, set the -dosbatch_colons_comment variable to anything: > - - :let dosbatch_colons_comment = 1 - -There is an option that covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type -"dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter -is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: > - - :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1 - -If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected. - - -DOXYGEN *doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax* - -Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format -(similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp, -idl and php files, and should also work with java. - -There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done -explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file. -Example: > - :set syntax=c.doxygen -or > - // vim:syntax=c.doxygen - -It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting -the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by -adding the following to your .vimrc. > - :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1 - -There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, -and are to do with non-standard highlighting options. - -Variable Default Effect ~ -g:doxygen_enhanced_color -g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for - doxygen comments. - -doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic - and html_my_rendering underline. - -doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief - colour highlighting. - -doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending - punctuation of brief - -There are also some highlight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in -configuration. - -Highlight Effect ~ -doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing - punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section -doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the - \endlink from a \link section. - - -DTD *dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax* - -The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable -case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > - - :let dtd_ignore_case=1 - -The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If -this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: > - - :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1 - -before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file. -Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the -'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'. -Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant' -highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the -delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: > - - :let dtd_no_param_entities=1 - -The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's. - - -EIFFEL *eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax* - -While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the -syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to -highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive -highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > - - :let eiffel_ignore_case=1 - -Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments. - -Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: > - - :let eiffel_strict=1 - :let eiffel_pedantic=1 - -Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the -five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and -"NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names. - -Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style -guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and -lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords). - -If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void", -"Result", and "Precursor", you can use > - - :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1 - -instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off. - -Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already -experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: > - - :let eiffel_ise=1 - -Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add > - - :let eiffel_hex_constants=1 - -to your startup file. - - -EUPHORIA *euphoria3.vim* *euphoria4.vim* *ft-euphoria-syntax* - -Two syntax highlighting files exist for Euphoria. One for Euphoria -version 3.1.1, which is the default syntax highlighting file, and one for -Euphoria version 4.0.5 or later. - -Euphoria version 3.1.1 (http://www.rapideuphoria.com/) is still necessary -for developing applications for the DOS platform, which Euphoria version 4 -(http://www.openeuphoria.org/) does not support. - -The following file extensions are auto-detected as Euphoria file type: - - *.e, *.eu, *.ew, *.ex, *.exu, *.exw - *.E, *.EU, *.EW, *.EX, *.EXU, *.EXW - -To select syntax highlighting file for Euphoria, as well as for -auto-detecting the *.e and *.E file extensions as Euphoria file type, -add the following line to your startup file: > - - :let g:filetype_euphoria = "euphoria3" - -< or > - - :let g:filetype_euphoria = "euphoria4" - -Elixir and Euphoria share the *.ex file extension. If the filetype is -specifically set as Euphoria with the g:filetype_euphoria variable, or the -file is determined to be Euphoria based on keywords in the file, then the -filetype will be set as Euphoria. Otherwise, the filetype will default to -Elixir. - - -ERLANG *erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax* - -Erlang is a functional programming language developed by Ericsson. Files with -the following extensions are recognized as Erlang files: erl, hrl, yaws. - -The BIFs (built-in functions) are highlighted by default. To disable this, -put the following line in your vimrc: > - - :let g:erlang_highlight_bifs = 0 - -To enable highlighting some special atoms, put this in your vimrc: > - - :let g:erlang_highlight_special_atoms = 1 - - -ELIXIR *elixir.vim* *ft-elixir-syntax* - -Elixir is a dynamic, functional language for building scalable and -maintainable applications. - -The following file extensions are auto-detected as Elixir file types: - - *.ex, *.exs, *.eex, *.leex, *.lock - -Elixir and Euphoria share the *.ex file extension. If the filetype is -specifically set as Euphoria with the g:filetype_euphoria variable, or the -file is determined to be Euphoria based on keywords in the file, then the -filetype will be set as Euphoria. Otherwise, the filetype will default to -Elixir. - - -FLEXWIKI *flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax* - -FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com -NOTE: This site currently doesn't work, on Wikipedia is mentioned that -development stopped in 2009. - -Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki -syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make -editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the -start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length), -'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak' -(to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen), -and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default. - -If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys -move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: > - :let flexwiki_maps = 1 - - -FORM *form.vim* *ft-form-syntax* - -The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default -modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String, -following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by -J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991. - -If you want to include your own changes to the default colors, you have to -redefine the following syntax groups: - - - formConditional - - formNumber - - formStatement - - formHeaderStatement - - formComment - - formPreProc - - formDirective - - formType - - formString - -Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and -directives per default in the same syntax group. - -A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between -header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate -this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file > - - :let form_enhanced_color=1 - -The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark -gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and -conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction. - -Both Visual Basic and FORM use the extension ".frm". To detect which one -should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first five lines of -the file. If it is found, filetype will be "vb", otherwise "form". - -If the automatic detection doesn't work for you or you only edit, for -example, FORM files, use this in your startup vimrc: > - :let filetype_frm = "form" - - -FORTH *forth.vim* *ft-forth-syntax* - -Files matching "*.fs" could be F# or Forth. If the automatic detection -doesn't work for you, or you don't edit F# at all, use this in your -startup vimrc: > - :let filetype_fs = "forth" - - -FORTRAN *fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax* - -Default highlighting and dialect ~ -Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default. This choice -should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is -almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77). - -Fortran source code form ~ -Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the -syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set. - -When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source -form. If you always use free source form, then > - :let fortran_free_source=1 -in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed -source form, then > - :let fortran_fixed_source=1 -in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. - -If the form of the source code depends, in a non-standard way, upon the file -extension, then it is most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin -file. For more information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. Note that this -will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax -on" command in your .vimrc file. - -When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free -source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes -fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If -neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to -determine which source form has been used by examining the file extension -using conventions common to the ifort, gfortran, Cray, NAG, and PathScale -compilers (.f, .for, .f77 for fixed-source, .f90, .f95, .f03, .f08 for -free-source). If none of this works, then the script examines the first five -columns of the first 500 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form -are detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The -algorithm should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a -file that begins with 500 or more full-line comments, the script may -incorrectly decide that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens, -just add a non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns -of the first twenty-five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file. - -Tabs in fortran files ~ -Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in -fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries. -Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like -using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the -variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as > - :let fortran_have_tabs=1 -placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will -mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins. - -Syntax folding of fortran files ~ -If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable -fortran_fold with a command such as > - :let fortran_fold=1 -to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that -is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function -subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you -also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as > - :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1 -then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select -case constructs. If you also set the variable -fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as > - :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1 -then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment -lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files. - -If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or -fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if -you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program -units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program -unit. - -More precise fortran syntax ~ -If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as > - :let fortran_more_precise=1 -then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular, -statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be -recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall -construct. - -Non-default fortran dialects ~ -The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably -find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory. A few legacy constructs -deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo -items. - -If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that -other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and -that free source form will be assumed. - -The dialect can be selected in various ways. If all your fortran files use -the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior -to your syntax on statement. The case-sensitive, permissible values of -fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are -ignored. - -If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to -set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file. For more information on -ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your fortran files with -an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should -contain the code > - let s:extfname = expand("%:e") - if s:extfname ==? "f90" - let b:fortran_dialect="F" - else - unlet! b:fortran_dialect - endif -Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command -precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file. - -Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify -the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis, -by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or -f08) in one of the first three lines in your file. For example, your older .f -files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would -identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a -Fortran comment of the form > - ! fortran_dialect=F - -For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the -now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be -silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F" -instead. - -The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to -comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some -non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted -or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo -items. - -Limitations ~ -Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith -strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly -because Fortran90 has no reserved words. - -For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and -|ft-fortran-plugin|. - -FREEBASIC *freebasic.vim* *ft-freebasic-syntax* - -FreeBASIC files will be highlighted differently for each of the four available -dialects, "fb", "qb", "fblite" and "deprecated". See |ft-freebasic-plugin| -for how to select the correct dialect. - -Highlighting is further configurable via the following variables. - -Variable Highlight ~ -*freebasic_no_comment_fold* disable multiline comment folding -*freebasic_operators* non-alpha operators -*freebasic_space_errors* trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab> -*freebasic_type_suffixes* QuickBASIC style type suffixes - - - -FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES *fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax* - -In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match -the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns -appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these -patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version -number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm. - -For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/ -as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: > - - :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 | - \ set filetype=fvwm - -GSP *gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax* - -The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by |html.vim|, and -the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks) -is defined by |java.vim|. The following HTML groups defined in |html.vim| -are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code: - - htmlString - htmlValue - htmlEndTag - htmlTag - htmlTagN - -Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline -java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML -group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight -correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava -to the contains clause. - -The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError -group to make them easier to see. - - -GROFF *groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax* - -The groff syntax file is a wrapper for |nroff.vim|, see the notes -under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose -of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the -filetype from a |modeline| or in a personal filetype definitions file -(see |filetype.txt|). - - -HASKELL *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax* - -The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate -Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell -syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives. - -If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a -light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: > - :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1 -To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers, -add: > - :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1 -To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: > - :let hs_highlight_types = 1 -And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: > - :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1 -If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in -your .vimrc: > - :let hs_highlight_debug = 1 - -The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor -directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid -directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for -operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those -as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: > - :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1 - -The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to -automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains -TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs -or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting -in your .vimrc > - :let lhs_markup = none -for no highlighting at all, or > - :let lhs_markup = tex -to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup. -For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of -this variable, so e.g. > - :let b:lhs_markup = tex -will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be -set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or -loading a file. - - -HTML *html.vim* *ft-html-syntax* - -The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows. - -The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag. -This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for -closing tags the 'Identifier' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those -are defined for you) - -Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag -names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which -makes it easy to spot errors - -Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute -names are colored differently than unknown ones. - -Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags -are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal -text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>, -while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but -only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in -<A href="somefile.html">). - -If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the -following syntax groups: - - - htmlBold - - htmlBoldUnderline - - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic - - htmlUnderline - - htmlUnderlineItalic - - htmlItalic - - htmlTitle for titles - - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings - -To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception -of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the -following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files -are read during initialization) > - :let html_my_rendering=1 - -If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at -http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html - -You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your -vimrc file: > - :let html_no_rendering=1 - -HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the -details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors. -However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and -ends with -->) you can define > - :let html_wrong_comments=1 - -JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as -'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard -programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are -currently supported, no other scripting language has been added yet. - -Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too. - -There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been -written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the -following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language -(the example comes from the asp.vim file): -> - runtime! syntax/html.vim - syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp - -Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain -the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc. - - *html-folding* -The HTML syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between start -and end tags. This can be turned on by > - - :let g:html_syntax_folding = 1 - :set foldmethod=syntax - -Note: Syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly, -especially for large files. - - -HTML/OS (by Aestiva) *htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax* - -The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows: - -Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM -doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change -this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a -different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: > - :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray - -Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose. - -Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to -signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening -a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: > - :set syntax=htmlos - -Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a -block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively. - - -IA64 *ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax* - -Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See |asm.vim| for -how to recognize this filetype. - -To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: > - :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64" - - -INFORM *inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax* - -Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as -most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols -to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: > - :let inform_highlight_simple=1 - -By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted, -and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If -you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you -need to add this to your startup sequence: > - :let inform_highlight_glulx=1 - -This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the -set of highlighted system functions. - -The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when -it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors -by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your -startup sequence: > - :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1 - -By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler -version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older -Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your -startup sequence: > - :let inform_highlight_old=1 - -IDL *idl.vim* *idl-syntax* - -IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In -Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls. - -IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to -rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat -repetitive but seems to work. - -There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them -are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions. - -The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions. - -Variable Effect ~ - -idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific - extensions -idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions -idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but - quite helpful) -idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors - - -JAVA *java.vim* *ft-java-syntax* - -The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options: - -In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was -flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous -classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the -old way, put the following line into your vim startup file: > - :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1 - -All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To -highlight them use: > - :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1 - -You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you -download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html. -If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io -use the following: > - :let java_highlight_java_io=1 -Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported. - -Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on -how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight -functions: - -If you write function declarations that are always indented by either -a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set > - :let java_highlight_functions="indent" -However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are -supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use > - :let java_highlight_functions="style" -If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function -declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the -definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the -original one and then adds the code to highlight functions. - -In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should -only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging -statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in -your startup file: > - :let java_highlight_debug=1 -The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special' -characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define -new highlightings for the following groups.: - Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType -which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug -strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I -have opted to choose another background for those statements. - -Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and -creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code -similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|). You can even add Javascript -and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however: - 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by - some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change - the color change the group CommentTitle). - 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'. - 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special' - 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials - and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function. -To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: > - :let java_ignore_javadoc=1 - -If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you -can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic -scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you -actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded -CSS. The options to use are > - :let java_javascript=1 - :let java_css=1 - :let java_vb=1 - -In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors -for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with > - :hi link javaParen Comment -or > - :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff - -If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed -when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable -to a larger number: > - :let java_minlines = 50 -This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first -displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger -number is that redrawing can become slow. - - -JSON *json.vim* *ft-json-syntax* - -The json syntax file provides syntax highlighting with conceal support by -default. To disable concealment: > - let g:vim_json_conceal = 0 - -To disable syntax highlighting of errors: > - let g:vim_json_warnings = 0 - - -LACE *lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax* - -Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the -style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just -define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: > - :let lace_case_insensitive=1 - - -LEX *lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax* - -Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter -gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for > - :syn sync minlines=300 -may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization -difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files). - - -LIFELINES *lifelines.vim* *ft-lifelines-syntax* - -To highlight deprecated functions as errors, add in your .vimrc: > - - :let g:lifelines_deprecated = 1 -< - -LISP *lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax* - -The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: > - - g:lisp_instring : If it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted - as if the contents of the string were lisp. - Useful for AutoLisp. - g:lisp_rainbow : If it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels - of parenthesization will receive different - highlighting. -< -The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for -the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of -colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode -specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the -usual color scheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual -highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see |'bg'|). - - -LITE *lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax* - -There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting. - -If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > - - :let lite_sql_query = 1 - -For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can -set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > - - :let lite_minlines = 200 - - -LPC *lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax* - -LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensjö C. The -file name of LPC is usually *.c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother -users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you -should set a variable in your .vimrc file: > - - :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1 - -If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a -modeline. For a LPC file: - - // vim:set ft=lpc: - -For a C file that is recognized as LPC: - - // vim:set ft=c: - -If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file. - -There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely -used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22 -and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also -assert the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when -you are using the latest version of MudOS: > - - :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1 - -For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: > - - :let lpc_compat_32 = 1 - -For LPC4 series of LPC: > - - :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1 - -For uLPC series of LPC: -uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax -instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike - - -LUA *lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax* - -The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is -the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables -lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua -5.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this: - - :let lua_version = 5 - :let lua_subversion = 1 - - -MAIL *mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim* - -Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures, -quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions, -signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by -whitespaces and end with a newline. - -Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>' -as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text -only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space). - -By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first -displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails -with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: > - - :let mail_minlines = 30 - - -MAKE *make.vim* *ft-make-syntax* - -In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot -errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this -feature off by using: > - - :let make_no_commands = 1 - - -MAPLE *maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax* - -Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language -supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user. -The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be -highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: > - - :let mvpkg_all= 1 - -to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by -choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to -1, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing -$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim). - - Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors > - mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process - mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex - mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats - mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student - mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools - mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor - mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder - mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries - - -MARKDOWN *ft-markdown-syntax* - -If you have long regions there might be wrong highlighting. At the cost of -slowing down displaying, you can have the engine look further back to sync on -the start of a region, for example 500 lines: > - - :let g:markdown_minlines = 500 - - -MATHEMATICA *mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax* - -Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you -have the following in your .vimrc: > - - let filetype_m = "mma" - - -MOO *moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax* - -If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your -highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style -comments: > - - :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1 - -To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: > - - :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1 - -To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching -'%(' and '%)' inside strings: > - - :let moo_no_regexp = 1 - -Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: > - - :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1 - -To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): > - - :let moo_builtin_properties = 1 - -Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you -use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group. -To enable this option: > - - :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1 - -An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: > - - :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained - - -MSQL *msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax* - -There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting. - -If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > - - :let msql_sql_query = 1 - -For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can -set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > - - :let msql_minlines = 200 - - -N1QL *n1ql.vim* *ft-n1ql-syntax* - -N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in -Couchbase Server databases. - -Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments, -and special values. Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its -many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL. - - -NCF *ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax* - -There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting. - -If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as -errors, use this: > - - :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1 - -If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset. - - -NROFF *nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax* - -The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to -activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you -can use them. - -For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text -processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting -features for groff, arrange for files to be recognized as groff (see -|ft-groff-syntax|) or add the following option to your start-up files: > - - :let nroff_is_groff = 1 - -Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in -Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and -there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff -you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you -can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's -native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly: -\[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm -accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim -environments. - -In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should -follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation. - -1. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines. - -2. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period, - exclamation mark, etc. - -3. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a - carriage return. - -The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking -algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above. - -Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and, -furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and -vertical space input will be output as is. - -Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences -than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common -practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation -marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you -need to maintain regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing -spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: > - - :let nroff_space_errors = 1 - -Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere -with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching -highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and -"nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: > - - hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse - hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold - \ gui=reverse,bold - -If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as -with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc -file: > - - let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1 - -As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended -paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package. - -Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling -groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default. - - -OCAML *ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax* - -The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml, -.mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable > - - :let ocaml_revised = 1 - -you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported -by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable > - - :let ocaml_noend_error = 1 - -prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources -contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore. - - -PAPP *papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax* - -The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extent, .pxml -and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml -as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml -sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If -you set the variable: > - - :let papp_include_html=1 - -in your startup file it will try to syntax-highlight html code inside phtml -sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to -edit sensibly. ;) - -The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at -http://papp.plan9.de. - - -PASCAL *pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax* - -Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal and those matching "*.pp" -could be Puppet or Pascal. If the automatic detection doesn't work for you, -or you only edit Pascal files, use this in your startup vimrc: > - - :let filetype_p = "pascal" - :let filetype_pp = "pascal" - -The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions -provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler. -Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are -enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the -following line to your startup file: > - - :let pascal_traditional=1 - -To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments, -keywords, etc): > - - :let pascal_delphi=1 - - -The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +, -*, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol -operators, add the following line to your startup file: > - - :let pascal_symbol_operator=1 - -Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: > - - :let pascal_no_functions=1 - -Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers. Besides -pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to -match Turbo Pascal. > - - :let pascal_gpc=1 - -or > - - :let pascal_fpc=1 - -To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the -pascal_one_line_string variable. > - - :let pascal_one_line_string=1 - -If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs -will be highlighted as Error. > - - :let pascal_no_tabs=1 - - - -PERL *perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax* - -There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting. - -Inline POD highlighting is now turned on by default. If you don't wish -to have the added complexity of highlighting POD embedded within Perl -files, you may set the 'perl_include_pod' option to 0: > - - :let perl_include_pod = 0 - -To reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch -off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. > - -To handle package references in variable and function names not differently -from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): > - - :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1 - -(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables" -enabled it.) - -If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: > - - :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1 - -(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.) - -The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will -be highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable -perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line. - - "hello world!"; qq|hello world|; - ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement) - S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement) - -(^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all) - -The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of -synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly. -If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely -then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can -figure out the line that causes the mistake. - -One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. > - - :let perl_no_sync_on_sub - :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var - -Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for -its attempts in syntax highlighting. > - - :let perl_sync_dist = 100 - -If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: > - - :let perl_fold = 1 - -If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: > - - :let perl_fold_blocks = 1 - -Subroutines are folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. If you do not want -this, you can set 'perl_nofold_subs': > - - :let perl_nofold_subs = 1 - -Anonymous subroutines are not folded by default; you may enable their folding -via 'perl_fold_anonymous_subs': > - - :let perl_fold_anonymous_subs = 1 - -Packages are also folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. To disable this -behavior, set 'perl_nofold_packages': > - - :let perl_nofold_packages = 1 - -PHP3 and PHP4 *php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax* - -[Note: Previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4 -it has been renamed to "php"] - -There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting. - -If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: > - - let php_sql_query = 1 - -For highlighting the Baselib methods: > - - let php_baselib = 1 - -Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: > - - let php_htmlInStrings = 1 - -Using the old colorstyle: > - - let php_oldStyle = 1 - -Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: > - - let php_asp_tags = 1 - -Disable short tags: > - - let php_noShortTags = 1 - -For highlighting parent error ] or ): > - - let php_parent_error_close = 1 - -For skipping a php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing -one: > - - let php_parent_error_open = 1 - -Enable folding for classes and functions: > - - let php_folding = 1 - -Selecting syncing method: > - - let php_sync_method = x - -x = -1 to sync by search (default), -x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards, -x = 0 to sync from start. - - -PLAINTEX *plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax* - -TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain" -variant of TeX. If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX, -see |ft-tex-plugin|. - -This syntax file has the option > - - let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1 - -if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}". - - -PPWIZARD *ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax* - -PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files - -This syntax file has the options: - -- ppwiz_highlight_defs : Determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's - definitions. Possible values are - - ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the - colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables). - - ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : Preprocessor #define and #evaluate - statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line - continuation symbols. - - The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1. - -- ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal - HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text. - - -PHTML *phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax* - -There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting. - -If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > - - :let phtml_sql_query = 1 - -For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can -set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > - - :let phtml_minlines = 200 - - -POSTSCRIPT *postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax* - -There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript. - -First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are -currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original -and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2. -Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of -extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest -level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want -highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: > - - :let postscr_level=2 - -If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is -the most prevalent version currently. - -Note: Not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a -particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of -PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript! - -If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of -Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as -follows: > - - :let postscr_display=1 - -If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of -Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable -postscr_ghostscript as follows: > - - :let postscr_ghostscript=1 - -PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it -useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can -cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and -character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working -explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be -highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: > - - :let postscr_fonts=1 - :let postscr_encodings=1 - -There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In -PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their -operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators, -if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical -operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way -or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be -highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable -postscr_andornot_binary as follows: > - - :let postscr_andornot_binary=1 -< - - *ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax* -PRINTCAP + TERMCAP *ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax* - -This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases. - -In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match -the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns -appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file. For these -patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or -"term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap. - -For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap -files, add the following: > - - :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" | - \ set filetype=ptcap - -If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which -are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines" -internal variable to a larger number: > - - :let ptcap_minlines = 50 - -(The default is 20 lines.) - - -PROGRESS *progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax* - -Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection -doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your -startup vimrc: > - :let filetype_w = "progress" -The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be -Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: > - :let filetype_i = "progress" - :let filetype_p = "progress" - - -PYTHON *python.vim* *ft-python-syntax* - -There are six options to control Python syntax highlighting. - -For highlighted numbers: > - :let python_no_number_highlight = 1 - -For highlighted builtin functions: > - :let python_no_builtin_highlight = 1 - -For highlighted standard exceptions: > - :let python_no_exception_highlight = 1 - -For highlighted doctests and code inside: > - :let python_no_doctest_highlight = 1 -or > - :let python_no_doctest_code_highlight = 1 -The first option implies the second one. - -For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: > - :let python_space_error_highlight = 1 - -If you want all possible Python highlighting: - :let python_highlight_all = 1 -This has the same effect as setting python_space_error_highlight and -unsetting all the other ones. - -If you use Python 2 or straddling code (Python 2 and 3 compatible), -you can enforce the use of an older syntax file with support for -Python 2 and up to Python 3.5. > - :let python_use_python2_syntax = 1 -This option will exclude all modern Python 3.6 or higher features. - -Note: Only existence of these options matters, not their value. - You can replace 1 above with anything. - - -QUAKE *quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax* - -The Quake syntax definition should work for most FPS (First Person Shooter) -based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary a bit -between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the syntax -definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow users -to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables can -be set for the following effects: - -set to highlight commands only available in Quake: > - :let quake_is_quake1 = 1 - -set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: > - :let quake_is_quake2 = 1 - -set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: > - :let quake_is_quake3 = 1 - -Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more -commands than are actually available to you by the game. - - -R *r.vim* *ft-r-syntax* - -The parsing of R code for syntax highlight starts 40 lines backwards, but you -can set a different value in your |vimrc|. Example: > - let r_syntax_minlines = 60 - -You can also turn off syntax highlighting of ROxygen: > - let r_syntax_hl_roxygen = 0 - -enable folding of code delimited by parentheses, square brackets and curly -braces: > - let r_syntax_folding = 1 - -and highlight as functions all keywords followed by an opening parenthesis: > - let r_syntax_fun_pattern = 1 - - -R MARKDOWN *rmd.vim* *ft-rmd-syntax* - -To disable syntax highlight of YAML header, add to your |vimrc|: > - let rmd_syn_hl_yaml = 0 - -To disable syntax highlighting of citation keys: > - let rmd_syn_hl_citations = 0 - -To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers: > - let rmd_syn_hl_chunk = 1 - -By default, chunks of R code will be highlighted following the rules of R -language. If you want proper syntax highlighting of chunks of other languages, -you should add them to either `markdown_fenced_languages` or -`rmd_fenced_languages`. For example to properly highlight both R and Python, -you may add this to your |vimrc|: > - let rmd_fenced_languages = ['r', 'python'] - - -R RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rrst.vim* *ft-rrst-syntax* - -To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers, add to your |vimrc|: > - let rrst_syn_hl_chunk = 1 - - -READLINE *readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax* - -The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a -few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these -items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the -command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: > - let readline_has_bash = 1 - -This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and -later, and part earlier) adds. - - -REGO *rego.vim* *ft-rego-syntax* - -Rego is a query language developed by Styra. It is mostly used as a policy -language for kubernetes, but can be applied to almost anything. Files with -the following extensions are recognized as rego files: .rego. - - -RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rst.vim* *ft-rst-syntax* - -Syntax highlighting is enabled for code blocks within the document for a -select number of file types. See $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/rst.vim for the default -syntax list. - -To set a user-defined list of code block syntax highlighting: > - let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...] - -To assign multiple code block types to a single syntax, define -`rst_syntax_code_list` as a mapping: > - let rst_syntax_code_list = { - \ 'cpp': ['cpp', 'c++'], - \ 'bash': ['bash', 'sh'], - ... - \ } - -To use color highlighting for emphasis text: > - let rst_use_emphasis_colors = 1 - -To enable folding of sections: > - let rst_fold_enabled = 1 - -Note that folding can cause performance issues on some platforms. - - -REXX *rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax* - -If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed -when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable -to a larger number: > - :let rexx_minlines = 50 -This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first -displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger -number is that redrawing can become slow. - -Vim tries to guess what type a ".r" file is. If it can't be detected (from -comment lines), the default is "r". To make the default rexx add this line to -your .vimrc: *g:filetype_r* -> - :let g:filetype_r = "r" - - -RUBY *ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax* - - Ruby: Operator highlighting |ruby_operators| - Ruby: Whitespace errors |ruby_space_errors| - Ruby: Folding |ruby_fold| |ruby_foldable_groups| - Ruby: Reducing expensive operations |ruby_no_expensive| |ruby_minlines| - Ruby: Spellchecking strings |ruby_spellcheck_strings| - - *ruby_operators* - Ruby: Operator highlighting ~ - -Operators can be highlighted by defining "ruby_operators": > - - :let ruby_operators = 1 -< - *ruby_space_errors* - Ruby: Whitespace errors ~ - -Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": > - - :let ruby_space_errors = 1 -< -This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character -as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and -"ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after -spaces respectively. - - *ruby_fold* *ruby_foldable_groups* - Ruby: Folding ~ - -Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": > - - :let ruby_fold = 1 -< -This will set the value of 'foldmethod' to "syntax" locally to the current -buffer or window, which will enable syntax-based folding when editing Ruby -filetypes. - -Default folding is rather detailed, i.e., small syntax units like "if", "do", -"%w[]" may create corresponding fold levels. - -You can set "ruby_foldable_groups" to restrict which groups are foldable: > - - :let ruby_foldable_groups = 'if case %' -< -The value is a space-separated list of keywords: - - keyword meaning ~ - -------- ------------------------------------- ~ - ALL Most block syntax (default) - NONE Nothing - if "if" or "unless" block - def "def" block - class "class" block - module "module" block - do "do" block - begin "begin" block - case "case" block - for "for", "while", "until" loops - { Curly bracket block or hash literal - [ Array literal - % Literal with "%" notation, e.g.: %w(STRING), %!STRING! - / Regexp - string String and shell command output (surrounded by ', ", `) - : Symbol - # Multiline comment - << Here documents - __END__ Source code after "__END__" directive - - *ruby_no_expensive* - Ruby: Reducing expensive operations ~ - -By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement -of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you -experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support) -you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: > - - :let ruby_no_expensive = 1 -< -In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords. - - *ruby_minlines* - -If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while -scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting -the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: > - - :let ruby_minlines = 100 -< -Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your -largest class or module. - - *ruby_spellcheck_strings* - Ruby: Spellchecking strings ~ - -Ruby syntax will perform spellchecking of strings if you define -"ruby_spellcheck_strings": > - - :let ruby_spellcheck_strings = 1 -< - -SCHEME *scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax* - -By default only R7RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented. - -scheme.vim also supports extensions of the CHICKEN Scheme->C compiler. -Define b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them. - - -SDL *sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax* - -The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many -of them it's almost impossibly to cope. - -The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are -case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be -used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the -highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: > - :let sdl_2000=1 - -This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old -keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: > - :let SDL_no_96=1 - - -The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very -satisfied with it for my own projects. - - -SED *sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax* - -To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo -highlighting on the tabs), define "g:sed_highlight_tabs" by putting > - - :let g:sed_highlight_tabs = 1 -< -in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs -inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included -by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is -also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that, -you can easily count the number of tabs in a string. - -GNU sed allows comments after text on the same line. BSD sed only allows -comments where "#" is the first character of the line. To enforce BSD-style -comments, i.e. mark end-of-line comments as errors, use: > - - :let g:sed_dialect = "bsd" -< -Note that there are other differences between GNU sed and BSD sed which are -not (yet) affected by this setting. - -Bugs: - - The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute - command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned, - transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong. - (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the - involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for - each plausible pattern delimiter). - - -SGML *sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax* - -The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows. - -The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag. -This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for -closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are -defined for you) - -Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag -names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors. - -Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute -names are colored differently than unknown ones. - -Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags -are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal -text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal> -<replaceable> <ulink> and <link>. - -If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the -following syntax groups: - - - sgmlBold - - sgmlBoldItalic - - sgmlUnderline - - sgmlItalic - - sgmlLink for links - -To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the -following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files -are read during initialization) > - let sgml_my_rendering=1 - -You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your -vimrc file: > - let sgml_no_rendering=1 - -(Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>) - - - *ft-posix-syntax* *ft-dash-syntax* -SH *sh.vim* *ft-sh-syntax* *ft-bash-syntax* *ft-ksh-syntax* - -This covers syntax highlighting for the older Unix (Bourne) sh, and newer -shells such as bash, dash, posix, and the Korn shells. - -Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that -various filenames are of specific types, e.g.: > - - ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh - bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash -< -See $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim for the full list of patterns. If none of these -cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined (ex. looking for -/bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, then -that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to be -shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems sh is -symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix). - -One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following -variables in your <.vimrc>: - - ksh: > - let g:is_kornshell = 1 -< posix: (using this is nearly the same as setting g:is_kornshell to 1) > - let g:is_posix = 1 -< bash: > - let g:is_bash = 1 -< sh: (default) Bourne shell > - let g:is_sh = 1 - -< (dash users should use posix) - -If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a -default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume -the Bourne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration -statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the -sh your system uses and install the associated "let..." in your <.vimrc>. - -The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: > - - let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0 (default, no syntax folding) - let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 (enable function folding) - let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2 (enable heredoc folding) - let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4 (enable if/do/for folding) -> -then various syntax items (ie. HereDocuments and function bodies) become -syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|). You also may add these together -to get multiple types of folding: > - - let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3 (enables function and heredoc folding) - -If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed -when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable -to a larger number. Example: > - - let sh_minlines = 500 - -This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first -displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger -number is that redrawing can become slow. - -If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To -reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: > - - let sh_maxlines = 100 -< -The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to -speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear. - -syntax/sh.vim tries to flag certain problems as errors; usually things like -unmatched "]", "done", "fi", etc. If you find the error handling problematic -for your purposes, you may suppress such error highlighting by putting -the following line in your .vimrc: > - - let g:sh_no_error= 1 -< - - *sh-embed* *sh-awk* - Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~ - -You may wish to embed languages into sh. I'll give an example courtesy of -Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following -file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: > - - " AWK Embedding: - " ============== - " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope. - if exists("b:current_syntax") - unlet b:current_syntax - endif - syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim - syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained - syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode - syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded - hi def link AWKCommand Type -< -This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: > - awk '...awk code here...' -be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax. Clearly this may be -extended to other languages. - - -SPEEDUP *spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax* -(AspenTech plant simulator) - -The Speedup syntax file has some options: - -- strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for - sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not - other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section). - -- highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types - like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a - plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in - the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include - them in the syntax file. - -- oneline_comments : This value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the - highlighting of # style comments. - - oneline_comments = 1 : Allow normal Speedup code after an even - number of #s. - - oneline_comments = 2 : Show code starting with the second # as - error. This is the default setting. - - oneline_comments = 3 : Show the whole line as error if it contains - more than one #. - -Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to -PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is -fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of -the syntax file. - - -SQL *sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax* - *sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax* - *sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax* - -While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own -custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of -SQL. Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default. - -Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax -scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL -supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a -buffer by buffer basis. - -For more detailed instructions see |ft_sql.txt|. - - -SQUIRREL *squirrel.vim* *ft-squirrel-syntax* - -Squirrel is a high level imperative, object-oriented programming language, -designed to be a light-weight scripting language that fits in the size, memory -bandwidth, and real-time requirements of applications like video games. Files -with the following extensions are recognized as squirrel files: .nut. - - -TCSH *tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax* - -This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See |csh.vim| -for how the filetype is detected. - -Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable -is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist -add this line to your .vimrc: > - - :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0 - -If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed -when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable -to a larger number: > - - :let tcsh_minlines = 1000 - -This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first -displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then -synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for -tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that -redrawing can become slow. - - -TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* *latex-syntax* - *syntax-tex* *syntax-latex* - - Tex Contents~ - Tex: Want Syntax Folding? |tex-folding| - Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted |g:tex_nospell| - Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? |tex-nospell| - Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones? |tex-verb| - Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones |tex-runon| - Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? |tex-slow| - Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? |tex-morecommands| - Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? |tex-error| - Tex: Need a new Math Group? |tex-math| - Tex: Starting a New Style? |tex-style| - Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode |tex-conceal| - Tex: Selective Conceal Mode |g:tex_conceal| - Tex: Controlling iskeyword |g:tex_isk| - Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control |tex-supersub| - Tex: Match Check Control |tex-matchcheck| - - *tex-folding* *g:tex_fold_enabled* - Tex: Want Syntax Folding? ~ - -As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters, -sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put > - let g:tex_fold_enabled=1 -in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a -modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: > - % vim: fdm=syntax -If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into > - https://vimhelp.org/vim_faq.txt.html#faq-29.7 -< - *g:tex_nospell* - Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted~ - -If you don't want spell checking anywhere in your LaTeX document, put > - let g:tex_nospell=1 -into your .vimrc. If you merely wish to suppress spell checking inside -comments only, see |g:tex_comment_nospell|. - - *tex-nospell* *g:tex_comment_nospell* - Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~ - -Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would -prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files. To do -this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: > - let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1 -If you want to suppress spell checking everywhere inside your LaTeX document, -see |g:tex_nospell|. - - *tex-verb* *g:tex_verbspell* - Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~ - -Often verbatim regions are used for things like source code; seldom does -one want source code spell-checked. However, for those of you who do -want your verbatim zones spell-checked, put the following in your <.vimrc>: > - let g:tex_verbspell= 1 -< - *tex-runon* *tex-stopzone* - Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones ~ - -The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The -highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and -texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones -terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized -as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a -special "TeX comment" has been provided > - %stopzone -which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a -texMathZone. - - *tex-slow* *tex-sync* - Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~ - -If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for > - :syn sync maxlines=200 - :syn sync minlines=50 -(especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to -increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group, -if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?). - -Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see -|tex-folding| for a way around this. - - *g:tex_fast* - -Finally, if syntax highlighting is still too slow, you may set > - - :let g:tex_fast= "" - -in your .vimrc. Used this way, the g:tex_fast variable causes the syntax -highlighting script to avoid defining any regions and associated -synchronization. The result will be much faster syntax highlighting; the -price: you will no longer have as much highlighting or any syntax-based -folding, and you will be missing syntax-based error checking. - -You may decide that some syntax is acceptable; you may use the following table -selectively to enable just some syntax highlighting: > - - b : allow bold and italic syntax - c : allow texComment syntax - m : allow texMatcher syntax (ie. {...} and [...]) - M : allow texMath syntax - p : allow parts, chapter, section, etc syntax - r : allow texRefZone syntax (nocite, bibliography, label, pageref, eqref) - s : allow superscript/subscript regions - S : allow texStyle syntax - v : allow verbatim syntax - V : allow texNewEnv and texNewCmd syntax -< -As an example, let g:tex_fast= "M" will allow math-associated highlighting -but suppress all the other region-based syntax highlighting. -(also see: |g:tex_conceal| and |tex-supersub|) - - *tex-morecommands* *tex-package* - Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~ - -LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full -of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a -package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support -it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the -techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided -by syntax/tex.vim. Please consider uploading any extensions that you write, -which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to -http://vim.sf.net/. - -I've included some support for various popular packages on my website: > - - http://www.drchip.org/astronaut/vim/index.html#LATEXPKGS -< -The syntax files there go into your .../after/syntax/tex/ directory. - - *tex-error* *g:tex_no_error* - Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~ - -The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus, -although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate -errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you, -you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: > - let g:tex_no_error=1 -and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed. - - *tex-math* - Tex: Need a new Math Group? ~ - -If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following -code shows you an example as to how you might do so: > - call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform) -You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix -(currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself). -As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: > - call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1) -You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group, -and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim. -The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group -has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*). - - *tex-style* *b:tex_stylish* - Tex: Starting a New Style? ~ - -One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in -commands available. However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the -following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag -such use of @ as an error. To solve this: > - - :let b:tex_stylish = 1 - :set ft=tex - -Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim> -always accept such use of @. - - *tex-cchar* *tex-cole* *tex-conceal* - Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode~ - -If you have |'conceallevel'| set to 2 and if your encoding is utf-8, then a -number of character sequences can be translated into appropriate utf-8 glyphs, -including various accented characters, Greek characters in MathZones, and -superscripts and subscripts in MathZones. Not all characters can be made into -superscripts or subscripts; the constraint is due to what utf-8 supports. -In fact, only a few characters are supported as subscripts. - -One way to use this is to have vertically split windows (see |CTRL-W_v|); one -with |'conceallevel'| at 0 and the other at 2; and both using |'scrollbind'|. - - *g:tex_conceal* - Tex: Selective Conceal Mode~ - -You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your -<.vimrc>. By default, g:tex_conceal is set to "admgs" to enable concealment -for the following sets of characters: > - - a = accents/ligatures - b = bold and italic - d = delimiters - m = math symbols - g = Greek - s = superscripts/subscripts -< -By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character -substitution will not be made. - - *g:tex_isk* *g:tex_stylish* - Tex: Controlling iskeyword~ - -Normally, LaTeX keywords support 0-9, a-z, A-z, and 192-255 only. Latex -keywords don't support the underscore - except when in *.sty files. The -syntax highlighting script handles this with the following logic: - - * If g:tex_stylish exists and is 1 - then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_" - will be allowed as part of keywords - (regardless of g:tex_isk) - * Else if the file's suffix is sty, cls, clo, dtx, or ltx, - then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_" - will be allowed as part of keywords - (regardless of g:tex_isk) - - * If g:tex_isk exists, then it will be used for the local 'iskeyword' - * Else the local 'iskeyword' will be set to 48-57,a-z,A-Z,192-255 - - *tex-supersub* *g:tex_superscripts* *g:tex_subscripts* - Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control~ - - See |tex-conceal| for how to enable concealed character replacement. - - See |g:tex_conceal| for selectively concealing accents, bold/italic, - math, Greek, and superscripts/subscripts. - - One may exert fine control over which superscripts and subscripts one - wants syntax-based concealment for (see |:syn-cchar|). Since not all - fonts support all characters, one may override the - concealed-replacement lists; by default these lists are given by: > - - let g:tex_superscripts= "[0-9a-zA-W.,:;+-<>/()=]" - let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aehijklmnoprstuvx,+-/().]" -< - For example, I use Luxi Mono Bold; it doesn't support subscript - characters for "hklmnpst", so I put > - let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aeijoruvx,+-/().]" -< in ~/.vim/ftplugin/tex/tex.vim in order to avoid having inscrutable - utf-8 glyphs appear. - - *tex-matchcheck* *g:tex_matchcheck* - Tex: Match Check Control~ - - Sometimes one actually wants mismatched parentheses, square braces, - and or curly braces; for example, \text{(1,10]} is a range from but - not including 1 to and including 10. This wish, of course, conflicts - with the desire to provide delimiter mismatch detection. To - accommodate these conflicting goals, syntax/tex.vim provides > - g:tex_matchcheck = '[({[]' -< which is shown along with its default setting. So, if one doesn't - want [] and () to be checked for mismatches, try using > - let g:tex_matchcheck= '[{}]' -< If you don't want matching to occur inside bold and italicized - regions, > - let g:tex_excludematcher= 1 -< will prevent the texMatcher group from being included in those regions. - -TF *tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax* - -There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting. - -For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can -set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > - - :let tf_minlines = your choice -< -VIM *vim.vim* *ft-vim-syntax* - *g:vimsyn_minlines* *g:vimsyn_maxlines* -There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen -updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the -g:vimsyn_minlines variable. The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to -improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). > - - g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines - g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines -< - (g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of - these two options) - - *g:vimsyn_embed* -The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of -embedded script highlighting they wish to have. > - - g:vimsyn_embed == 0 : don't support any embedded scripts - g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'l' : support embedded lua - g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : support embedded mzscheme - g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : support embedded perl - g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : support embedded python - g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : support embedded ruby - g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : support embedded tcl -< -By default, g:vimsyn_embed is a string supporting interpreters that your vim -itself supports. Concatenate multiple characters to support multiple types -of embedded interpreters; ie. g:vimsyn_embed= "mp" supports embedded mzscheme -and embedded perl. - *g:vimsyn_folding* - -Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: > - - g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding - g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups - g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions - g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'l' : fold lua script - g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script - g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl script - g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python script - g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby script - g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl script -< - *g:vimsyn_noerror* -Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; Vim script -is a difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error -highlighting is to put the following line in your |vimrc|: > - - let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1 -< - - -WDL *wdl.vim* *wdl-syntax* - -The Workflow Description Language is a way to specify data processing workflows -with a human-readable and writeable syntax. This is used a lot in -bioinformatics. More info on the spec can be found here: -https://github.com/openwdl/wdl - - -XF86CONFIG *xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax* - -The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both -variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect. -You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable -xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in -your .vimrc. Example: > - :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3 -When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable. - -Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use -"SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name -highlighted. - - -XML *xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax* - -Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by -setting a global variable: > - - :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1 -< - *xml-folding* -The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between -start and end tags. This can be turned on by > - - :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1 - :set foldmethod=syntax - -Note: Syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly, -especially for large files. - - -X Pixmaps (XPM) *xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax* - -xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the -XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings, -you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm". - -To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it -somewhere else with "P". - -Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: > - :function! GetPixel() - : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1] - : echo c - : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r" .. c - : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r" .. c - :endfunction - :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR> - :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor -This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen. -It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you -must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it. - -It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: > - :set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-* - - -YAML *yaml.vim* *ft-yaml-syntax* - - *g:yaml_schema* *b:yaml_schema* -A YAML schema is a combination of a set of tags and a mechanism for resolving -non-specific tags. For user this means that YAML parser may, depending on -plain scalar contents, treat plain scalar (which can actually be only string -and nothing else) as a value of the other type: null, boolean, floating-point, -integer. `g:yaml_schema` option determines according to which schema values -will be highlighted specially. Supported schemas are - -Schema Description ~ -failsafe No additional highlighting. -json Supports JSON-style numbers, booleans and null. -core Supports more number, boolean and null styles. -pyyaml In addition to core schema supports highlighting timestamps, - but there are some differences in what is recognized as - numbers and many additional boolean values not present in core - schema. - -Default schema is `core`. - -Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the -only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only -difference defined in the syntax file. - - -ZSH *zsh.vim* *ft-zsh-syntax* - -The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: > - - :let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1 - -============================================================================== -6. Defining a syntax *:syn-define* *E410* - -Vim understands three types of syntax items: - -1. Keyword - It can only contain keyword characters, according to the characters - specified with |:syn-iskeyword| or the 'iskeyword' option. It cannot - contain other syntax items. It will only match with a complete word (there - are no keyword characters before or after the match). The keyword "if" - would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because "(" is not a - keyword character and "d" is. - -2. Match - This is a match with a single regexp pattern. - -3. Region - This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match - with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A - "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern. - -Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group -you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item -to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment, -and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a -"Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make -one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group. -This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting -each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting -for a lot of groups. - -Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight -group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used -for the syntax group with the same name. - -In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was -defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by -using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a -match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a -keyword with ignoring case. - - -PRIORITY *:syn-priority* - -When several syntax items may match, these rules are used: - -1. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item - defined last has priority. -2. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items. -3. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that - start in later positions. - - -DEFINING CASE *:syn-case* *E390* - -:sy[ntax] case [match | ignore] - This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with - matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using - "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all - items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected. - -:sy[ntax] case - Show either "syntax case match" or "syntax case ignore". - - -DEFINING FOLDLEVEL *:syn-foldlevel* - -:sy[ntax] foldlevel start -:sy[ntax] foldlevel minimum - This defines how the foldlevel of a line is computed when using - foldmethod=syntax (see |fold-syntax| and |:syn-fold|): - - start: Use level of item containing start of line. - minimum: Use lowest local-minimum level of items on line. - - The default is "start". Use "minimum" to search a line horizontally - for the lowest level contained on the line that is followed by a - higher level. This produces more natural folds when syntax items - may close and open horizontally within a line. - -:sy[ntax] foldlevel - Show the current foldlevel method, either "syntax foldlevel start" or - "syntax foldlevel minimum". - - {not meaningful when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature} - -SPELL CHECKING *:syn-spell* - -:sy[ntax] spell toplevel -:sy[ntax] spell notoplevel -:sy[ntax] spell default - This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not - in a syntax item: - - toplevel: Text is spell checked. - notoplevel: Text is not spell checked. - default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking. - - For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters - |spell-syntax|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then - spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel". - - To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set. - -:sy[ntax] spell - Show the current syntax spell checking method, either "syntax spell - toplevel", "syntax spell notoplevel" or "syntax spell default". - - -SYNTAX ISKEYWORD SETTING *:syn-iskeyword* - -:sy[ntax] iskeyword [clear | {option}] - This defines the keyword characters. It's like the 'iskeyword' option - for but only applies to syntax highlighting. - - clear: Syntax specific iskeyword setting is disabled and the - buffer-local 'iskeyword' setting is used. - {option} Set the syntax 'iskeyword' option to a new value. - - Example: > - :syntax iskeyword @,48-57,192-255,$,_ -< - This would set the syntax specific iskeyword option to include all - alphabetic characters, plus the numeric characters, all accented - characters and also includes the "_" and the "$". - - If no argument is given, the current value will be output. - - Setting this option influences what |/\k| matches in syntax patterns - and also determines where |:syn-keyword| will be checked for a new - match. - - It is recommended when writing syntax files, to use this command to - set the correct value for the specific syntax language and not change - the 'iskeyword' option. - -DEFINING KEYWORDS *:syn-keyword* - -:sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}] - - This defines a number of keywords. - - {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment". - [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below. - {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group. - - Example: > - :syntax keyword Type int long char -< - The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to - all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword. - These examples do exactly the same: > - :syntax keyword Type contained int long char - :syntax keyword Type int long contained char - :syntax keyword Type int long char contained -< *E789* *E890* - When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in - Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the - variations at once: > - :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext] -< - Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the - characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character - isn't, the keyword will never be recognized. - Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in - 'iskeyword'. - See |:syn-iskeyword| for defining syntax specific iskeyword settings. - - A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the - keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest - and a keyword can't contain anything else. - - Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even - one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match - instead. - - The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters. - - The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment - differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained - and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different - highlight group. Example: > - :syn keyword vimCommand tag - :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag -< When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand" - highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that - contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used. - - -DEFINING MATCHES *:syn-match* - -:sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}] - [excludenl] - [keepend] - {pattern} - [{options}] - - This defines one match. - - {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment". - [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below. - [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$" - extend a containing match or region. Must be - given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl| - keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a - match with the end pattern. See - |:syn-keepend|. - {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match. - See |:syn-pattern| below. - Note that the pattern may match more than one - line, which makes the match depend on where - Vim starts searching for the pattern. You - need to make sure syncing takes care of this. - - Example (match a character constant): > - :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1 -< - -DEFINING REGIONS *:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end* - *E398* *E399* -:sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}] - [matchgroup={group-name}] - [keepend] - [extend] - [excludenl] - start={start-pattern} .. - [skip={skip-pattern}] - end={end-pattern} .. - [{options}] - - This defines one region. It may span several lines. - - {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment". - [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below. - [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following - start or end pattern matches only. Not used - for the text in between the matched start and - end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using - a different group for the start or end match. - See |:syn-matchgroup|. - keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a - match with the end pattern. See - |:syn-keepend|. - extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region - is contained in. See |:syn-extend|. - excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$" - extend a containing match or item. Only - useful for end patterns. Must be given before - the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl| - start={start-pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of - the region. See |:syn-pattern| below. - skip={skip-pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside - the region where not to look for the end - pattern. See |:syn-pattern| below. - end={end-pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of - the region. See |:syn-pattern| below. - - Example: > - :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+ -< - The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order. - There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more - start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip - pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It - is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign - (although it mostly looks better without white space). - - When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these - is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start - patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for - the end patterns. - - The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern. - Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the - end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern. - - The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the - search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what - you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in - the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble. - - Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start - pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT - work: > - :syn region First start="(" end=":" - :syn region Second start="(" end=";" -< The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has - higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next - ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: > - :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:" - :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};" -< This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and - repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible). - - *:syn-keepend* - By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern. - This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with - "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}" - will then end the contained region, but not the outer region: - { starts outer "{}" region - { starts contained "{}" region - } ends contained "{}" region - } ends outer "{} region - If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching - of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item. - This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for - contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing - that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: > - :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+ - :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend -< The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line, - even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>. - - When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried - after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first - encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any - contained matches. - *:syn-extend* - The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument. - When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses - "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be - extended. - This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while - others don't. Example: > - - :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript - :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained - :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend - -< Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue - further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript - item does extend the htmlRef item. - - Another example: > - :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend -< This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be - changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to - highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it - includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested - region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in. - - *:syn-excludenl* - When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$' - to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is - contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with - "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue - that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default - behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it: - 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all - contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be - used when all contained items must not extend the containing item. - 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match - from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if - only some contained items must not extend the containing item. - "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to. - - *:syn-matchgroup* - "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern - differently than the body of the region. Example: > - :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+ -< This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in - between with the "String" group. - The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow, - until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not - using a matchgroup. - - In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the - contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid - that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When - using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern - match that is highlighted with "matchgroup". - - Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in - different colors: > - :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2 - :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained - :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained - :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red - :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue - :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen -< - *E849* -The maximum number of syntax groups is 19999. - -============================================================================== -7. :syntax arguments *:syn-arguments* - -The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments. -The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order -and may be mixed with patterns. - -Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments -can not be used for all commands: - *E395* - contains oneline fold display extend concealends~ -:syntax keyword - - - - - - -:syntax match yes - yes yes yes - -:syntax region yes yes yes yes yes yes - -These arguments can be used for all three commands: - conceal - cchar - contained - containedin - nextgroup - transparent - skipwhite - skipnl - skipempty - -conceal *conceal* *:syn-conceal* - -When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable. -Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the -'conceallevel' option. The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether -concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to -edit the line. -Another way to conceal text is with |matchadd()|. - -concealends *:syn-concealends* - -When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of -the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable. -Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the -'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately -in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup" - -cchar *:syn-cchar* - *E844* -The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item -when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal -argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal -character defined in the 'listchars' option is used. The character cannot be -a control character such as Tab. Example: > - :syntax match Entity "&" conceal cchar=& -See |hl-Conceal| for highlighting. - -contained *:syn-contained* - -When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at -the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of -another match. Example: > - :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained - :syntax match Comment "//.*" contains=Todo - - -display *:syn-display* - -If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the -detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting, -by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is -to be displayed. - -Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these -conditions: -- The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region - for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next - line. -- The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or - make it continue on the next line. -- The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example - for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display", - because it may make that preprocessor match shorter. -- The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise, - and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a - "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would - match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line. - -Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used: -- match with a number -- match with a label - - -transparent *:syn-transparent* - -If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted -itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This -is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used -only to skip over a part of the text. - -The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in, -unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To -avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which -highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": > - :syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim - :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained - :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE - :hi link myString String - :hi link myWord Comment -Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last -match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent" -argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But -it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left -out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow -"myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Comment. This -happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same -position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here. - -When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained -items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you -see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look -through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture: - - look from here - - | | | | | | - V V V V V V - - xxxx yyy more contained items - .................... contained item (transparent) - ============================= first item - -The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a -transparent group. - -What you see is: - - =======xxxx=======yyy======== - -Thus you look through the transparent "....". - - -oneline *:syn-oneline* - -The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line -boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the -region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on -the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line -continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first -line, otherwise the region doesn't even start. - -When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end -pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The -end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument -means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must -be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a -line break. - - -fold *:syn-fold* - -The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item. -Example: > - :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold - :syn sync fromstart - :set foldmethod=syntax -This will make each {} block form one fold. - -The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item -ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold. -The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds. -See |:syn-foldlevel| to control how the foldlevel of a line is computed -from its syntax items. -{not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature} - - - *:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409* -contains={group-name},.. - -The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These -groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the -containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and -regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in -this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used -here. - -contains=ALL - If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all - groups will be accepted inside the item. - -contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},.. - If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all - groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that - are listed. Example: > - :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function - -contains=TOP - If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all - groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained" - argument. -contains=TOP,{group-name},.. - Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed. - -contains=CONTAINED - If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then - all groups will be accepted that have the "contained" - argument. -contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},.. - Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are - listed. - - -The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names -that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used). -The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: > - ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3] -The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups -that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax -command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting -syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because -the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the -group names. - -The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a -region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used -|:syn-matchgroup|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the -region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the -area that is highlighted - - -containedin={group-name}... *:syn-containedin* - -The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The -item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the -containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item. - -The {group-name}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above. - -This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to -be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition -of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading -the C syntax: > - :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained -Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top -level. - -Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can -appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that -keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't -work. - - -nextgroup={group-name},.. *:syn-nextgroup* - -The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names, -separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns). - -If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be -tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have -a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group -will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the -current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all -other groups. Example: > - :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo - :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller - :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained - -This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a -"Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for -highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. > - - Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf - fff bbb fff bbb - -Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar. -when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be -highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match -would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|). - - -skipwhite *:syn-skipwhite* -skipnl *:syn-skipnl* -skipempty *:syn-skipempty* - -These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be -used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text: - skipwhite skip over space and tab characters - skipnl skip over the end of a line - skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl") - -When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no -next group that matches the white space. - -When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next -line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current -line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after -the current item in the same line. - -When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other -groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried -for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white -space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items. - -Example: > - :syn match ifstart "\<if.*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty - :syn match ifline "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained - :syn match ifline "endif" contained -Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also -match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes -precedence. -Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add -"contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the -example). - -IMPLICIT CONCEAL *:syn-conceal-implicit* - -:sy[ntax] conceal [on|off] - This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords, - matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal - on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region" - defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal - off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be - given explicitly. - -:sy[ntax] conceal - Show either "syntax conceal on" or "syntax conceal off". - -============================================================================== -8. Syntax patterns *:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402* - -In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical -characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to -use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can -use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: > - :syntax region Comment start="/\*" end="\*/" - :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+ - -See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are -always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual -value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is -not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and -independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings. - -Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*". -This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere. - - *:syn-pattern-offset* -The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to -change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the -match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both -are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip -pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern. - -The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}" -The {what} can be one of seven strings: - -ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text -me Match End offset for the end of the matched text -hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts -he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends -rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts -re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends -lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern - -The {offset} can be: - -s start of the matched pattern -s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right -s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left -e end of the matched pattern -e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right -e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left -{nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars right of the start - -Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3". - -Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always -meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used: - - ms me hs he rs re lc ~ -match item yes yes yes yes - - yes -region item start yes - yes - yes - yes -region item skip - yes - - - - yes -region item end - yes - yes - yes yes - -Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: > - :syn match String /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1 -< - some "string" text - ^^^^^^ highlighted - -Notes: -- There must be no white space between the pattern and the character - offset(s). -- The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text. -- A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end - pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped. -- Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters. - This didn't work well for multibyte characters, so it was changed with the - Vim 7.2 release. -- The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern - matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting - start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e. - -Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): > - :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1 -< - /* this is a comment */ - ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted - -A more complicated Example: > - :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1 -< - abcfoostringbarabc - mmmmmmmmmmm match - sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar") - -Leading context *:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context* - -Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility -with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct -in the pattern. You can also often use |/\zs|. - -The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must -be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will -cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing -characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be -used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to -specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: > - - :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1 - :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1 - :syn match Underline "_\+" -< - ___zzzz ___wwww - ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline - ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash - ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash - -The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset, -unless you set "ms" explicitly. - - -Multi-line patterns *:syn-multi-line* - -The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as -expected, but there are a few exceptions. - -When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not -allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a -following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of -the match doesn't move to another line. - -The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will -continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is -matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line -halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a -previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern -is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: > - x x a - b x x -Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters -after the "\n". - - -External matches *:syn-ext-match* - -These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns: - - */\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* *E879* - \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it can be - accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable in - defining a syntax region start pattern. - - */\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5* - \z1 ... \z9 */\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67* - Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding - sub-expression in a previous start pattern match. - -Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common -sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix -shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression -items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be -referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document -example, for instance, can be done like this: > - :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$" - -As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern, -it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it -changes the \z1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the -first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can -also be used in skip patterns: > - :syn region foo start="start \z(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1" - -Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and -indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied -to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa". -Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references -within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one -sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest -the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)". - -Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches -cannot be referred to. - -============================================================================== -9. Syntax clusters *:syn-cluster* *E400* - -:sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..] - [add={group-name}..] - [remove={group-name}..] - -This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a -single name. - - contains={group-name}.. - The cluster is set to the specified list of groups. - add={group-name}.. - The specified groups are added to the cluster. - remove={group-name}.. - The specified groups are removed from the cluster. - -A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=.., -nextgroup=.., add=.. or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use -this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents. - -Example: > - :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers - :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2 - -As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively -retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so -to speak: > - :syntax keyword A aaa - :syntax keyword B bbb - :syntax cluster AandB contains=A - :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB - :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff - -This also has implications for nested clusters: > - :syntax keyword A aaa - :syntax keyword B bbb - :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B - :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup - :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup - :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup - :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff -< - *E848* -The maximum number of clusters is 9767. - -============================================================================== -10. Including syntax files *:syn-include* *E397* - -It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for -a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in -two different ways: - - - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be - allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use - the |:runtime| command: > - - " In cpp.vim: - :runtime! syntax/c.vim - :unlet b:current_syntax - -< - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be - contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the - ":syntax include" command: - -:sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name} - - All syntax items declared in the included file will have the - "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified, - all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to - that list. > - - " In perl.vim: - :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim - :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod -< - When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR" - or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path - (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'. - All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is - recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file - with their own version, without replacing the file that does the - ":syn include". - - *E847* -The maximum number of includes is 999. - -============================================================================== -11. Synchronizing *:syn-sync* *E403* *E404* - -Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To -make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where -redrawing starts. - -:sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...] - -There are four ways to synchronize: -1. Always parse from the start of the file. - |:syn-sync-first| -2. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can - figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment. - |:syn-sync-second| -3. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there. - |:syn-sync-third| -4. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on. - |:syn-sync-fourth| - - *:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines* -For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is -limited by "minlines" and "maxlines". - -If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least -that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few -lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing. - -If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched -for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after -adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a -slow machine. Example: > - :syntax sync maxlines=500 ccomment -< - *:syn-sync-linebreaks* -When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may -cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to -start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with -the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line -break use this: > - :syntax sync linebreaks=1 -The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a -change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the -value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks". - - -First syncing method: *:syn-sync-first* -> - :syntax sync fromstart - -The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting -accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text, -so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However, -when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst -case: to the end of the file). - -Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number. - - -Second syncing method: *:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment* - -For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given. -Example: > - :syntax sync ccomment - -When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style -comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be -used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"! -An alternate group name can be specified, for example: > - :syntax sync ccomment javaComment -This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be -used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that -region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/". - -The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of -lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of -lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few -lines, but it hard to sync on). - -Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used -that cross a line and contain a "*/". Since letting strings cross a line -is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the -chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction -is hardly ever noticed. - - -Third syncing method: *:syn-sync-third* - -For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given. -Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This -means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower. -Example: > - :syntax sync minlines=50 - -"lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions). - - -Fourth syncing method: *:syn-sync-fourth* - -The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a -sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some -region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search -starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there -the search continues backwards in the file. - -This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained -matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences: -- Keywords cannot be used. -- The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group - of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups. -- The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of - forwards. -- A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group - of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the - search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the - consecutive lines that contain the continuation pattern. -- When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or - group of continued lines). -- When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of - continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the - line (or group of continued lines). -- When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of - continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used. - This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region - (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used). - -There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used: -1. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the - search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected - to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions - that cross lines cannot contain other regions. -2. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group - that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified. - This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much - slower, because more text needs to be parsed. -Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time. - -Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to -avoid finding unwanted matches. - -[The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the -search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the -highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much) -faster.] - - *syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394* - :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" .. - - Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the - name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing - of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region - must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used. - "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match. - - *syn-sync-groupthere* - :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" .. - - Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that - is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync - point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync - pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting. - For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/". If - "/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the - "groupthere" is "cComment". If "*/" is found first, you know that you - are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice - it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear - inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...). - - :syntax sync match .. - :syntax sync region .. - - Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is - skipped while searching for a sync point. - - *syn-sync-linecont* - :syntax sync linecont {pattern} - - When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in - the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will - consider the lines to be concatenated. - -If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are -searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very -few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: > - :syntax sync maxlines=100 - -You can clear all sync settings with: > - :syntax sync clear - -You can clear specific sync patterns with: > - :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} .. - -============================================================================== -12. Listing syntax items *:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list* - -This command lists all the syntax items: > - - :sy[ntax] [list] - -To show the syntax items for one syntax group: > - - :sy[ntax] list {group-name} - -To list the syntax groups in one cluster: *E392* > - - :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name} - -See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command. - -Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn" -is mostly used, because it looks better. - -============================================================================== -13. Colorschemes *color-schemes* - -In the next section you can find information about individual highlight groups -and how to specify colors for them. Most likely you want to just select a set -of colors by using the `:colorscheme` command, for example: > - - colorscheme pablo -< - *:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185* -:colo[rscheme] Output the name of the currently active color scheme. - This is basically the same as > - :echo g:colors_name -< In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will - output "default". When compiled without the |+eval| - feature it will output "unknown". - -:colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath' - for the file "colors/{name}.vim". The first one that - is found is loaded. - Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below - "start" and then under "opt". - - Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use - ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script. - -You have two options for customizing a color scheme. For changing the -appearance of specific colors, you can redefine a color name before loading -the scheme. The desert scheme uses the khaki color for the cursor. To use a -darker variation of the same color: > - - let v:colornames['khaki'] = '#bdb76b' - colorscheme desert -< -For further customization, such as changing |:highlight-link| associations, -use another name, e.g. "~/.vim/colors/mine.vim", and use `:runtime` to load -the original color scheme: > - runtime colors/evening.vim - hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue - -Before the color scheme will be loaded all default color list scripts -(`colors/lists/default.vim`) will be executed and then the |ColorSchemePre| -autocommand event is triggered. After the color scheme has been loaded the -|ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered. - - *colorscheme-override* -If a color scheme is almost right, you can add modifications on top of it by -using the |ColorScheme| autocommand. For example, to remove the background -color (can make it transparent in some terminals): > - augroup my_colorschemes - au! - au Colorscheme pablo hi Normal ctermbg=NONE - augroup END - -Change a couple more colors: > - augroup my_colorschemes - au! - au Colorscheme pablo hi Normal ctermbg=NONE - \ | highlight Special ctermfg=63 - \ | highlight Identifier ctermfg=44 - augroup END - -If you make a lot of changes it might be better to copy the distributed -colorscheme to your home directory and change it: > - :!cp $VIMRUNTIME/colors/pablo.vim ~/.vim/colors - :edit ~/.vim/colors/pablo.vim - -With Vim 9.0 the collection of color schemes was updated and made work in many -different terminals. One change was to often define the Normal highlight -group to make sure the colors work well. In case you prefer the old version, -you can find them here: -https://github.com/vim/colorschemes/blob/master/legacy_colors/ - -For info about writing a color scheme file: > - :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt - - -============================================================================== -14. Highlight command *:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415* - -There are three types of highlight groups: -- The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the - name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are - linked to a group of the second type. -- The ones used for all syntax languages. -- The ones used for the 'highlight' option. - *hitest.vim* -You can see all the groups currently active with this command: > - :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim -This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed -in their own color. - -:hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have - attributes set. - -:hi[ghlight] {group-name} - List one highlight group. - - *highlight-clear* *:hi-clear* -:hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all - highlighting for groups added by the user. - Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which - default colors to use. - If there was a default link, restore it. |:hi-link| - -:hi[ghlight] clear {group-name} -:hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE - Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It - is _not_ set back to the default colors. - -:hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} .. - Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for - an existing group. If a given color name is not - recognized, each `colors/lists/default.vim` found on - |'runtimepath'| will be loaded. - See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments. - See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default] - argument. - -Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the -default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional -highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default -values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to -the default value. - -A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command. This loads -a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: > - - :hi Comment gui=bold - -Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the -specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the -result is like this single command has been used: > - :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold -< - *:highlight-verbose* -When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will -also tell where it was last set. Example: > - :verbose hi Comment -< Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~ - Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~ - -When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be -mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information. - - *highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423* -There are three types of terminals for highlighting: -term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm) -cterm a color terminal (MS-Windows console, color-xterm, these have the "Co" - termcap entry) -gui the GUI - -For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use -the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting. - -1. highlight arguments for normal terminals - - *bold* *underline* *undercurl* - *underdouble* *underdotted* - *underdashed* *inverse* *italic* - *standout* *nocombine* *strikethrough* -term={attr-list} *attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418* - attr-list is a comma-separated list (without spaces) of the - following items (in any order): - bold - underline - undercurl not always available - underdouble not always available - underdotted not always available - underdashed not always available - strikethrough not always available - reverse - inverse same as reverse - italic - standout - nocombine override attributes instead of combining them - NONE no attributes used (used to reset it) - - Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They - have the same effect. - *underline-codes* - "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible - then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough" - are only available in the GUI and some terminals. The color is set - with |highlight-guisp| or |highlight-ctermul|. You can try these - termcap entries to make undercurl work in a terminal: > - let &t_Cs = "\e[4:3m" - let &t_Ce = "\e[4:0m" - -< "underdouble" is a double underline, "underdotted" is a dotted - underline and "underdashed" is a dashed underline. These are only - supported by some terminals. If your terminal supports them you may - have to specify the codes like this: > - let &t_Us = "\e[4:2m" - let &t_ds = "\e[4:4m" - let &t_Ds = "\e[4:5m" -< They are reset with |t_Ce|, the same as curly underline (undercurl). - When t_Us, t_ds or t_Ds is not set then underline will be used as a - fallback. - - -start={term-list} *highlight-start* *E422* -stop={term-list} *term-list* *highlight-stop* - These lists of terminal codes can be used to get - non-standard attributes on a terminal. - - The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument - is written before the characters in the highlighted - area. It can be anything that you want to send to the - terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence - specified with the "stop" argument is written after the - highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument. - Otherwise the screen will look messed up. - - The {term-list} can have two forms: - - 1. A string with escape sequences. - This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with - "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized - here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example: - start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r; - - 2. A list of terminal codes. - Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of - the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas. - White space is not allowed. Example: - start=t_C1,t_BL - The terminal codes must exist for this to work. - - -2. highlight arguments for color terminals - -cterm={attr-list} *highlight-cterm* - See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|. - The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when - colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could - be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue. - Note: Some terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes - with coloring. To be portable, use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg=" - OR "ctermbg=". - -ctermfg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermfg* *E421* -ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg* -ctermul={color-nr} *highlight-ctermul* - These give the foreground (ctermfg), background (ctermbg) and - underline (ctermul) color to use in the terminal. - - The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to - (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co". - The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal - and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of - "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives - another color, on others you just get color 3. - - For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit - unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The - colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file. - Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors - for each user. See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms. - *tmux* - When using tmux you may want to use this in the tmux config: > - # tmux colors - set -s default-terminal "tmux-256color" - set -as terminal-overrides ",*-256color:Tc" -< More info at: - https://github.com/tmux/tmux/wiki/FAQ#how-do-i-use-a-256-colour-terminal - https://github.com/tmux/tmux/wiki/FAQ#how-do-i-use-rgb-colour - - The MS-Windows standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so - these have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in - X11 are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the - highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The - following names are recognized, with the color number used: - - *cterm-colors* - NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~ - 0 0 Black - 1 4 DarkBlue - 2 2 DarkGreen - 3 6 DarkCyan - 4 1 DarkRed - 5 5 DarkMagenta - 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow - 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey - 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey - 9 4* Blue, LightBlue - 10 2* Green, LightGreen - 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan - 12 1* Red, LightRed - 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta - 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow - 15 7* White - - The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co' - greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for - 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '*' indicates that the - bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g., - "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work - for background colors! Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed. - If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a - "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use - a number instead of a color name. - - The case of the color names is ignored. - Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the - numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '*' means 'add 8' so that - Blue is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc. - - Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong - colors! - - You can also use "NONE" to remove the color. - - *:hi-normal-cterm* - When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group, - these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text. - Example: > - :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue -< When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the - 'background' option will be adjusted automatically, under the - condition that the color is recognized and 'background' was not set - explicitly. This causes the highlight groups that depend on - 'background' to change! This means you should set the colors for - Normal first, before setting other colors. - When a color scheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to - be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First - delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this. - - When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim - needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op" - termcap entry |t_op|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the - 't_op' option in your .vimrc. - *E419* *E420* *E453* - When Vim knows the normal foreground, background and underline colors, - "fg", "bg" and "ul" can be used as color names. This only works after - setting the colors for the Normal group and for the MS-Windows - console. Example, for reverse video: > - :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg -< Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this - command is given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the - "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted. - - -3. highlight arguments for the GUI - -gui={attr-list} *highlight-gui* - These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode. - See |attr-list| for a description. - Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They - have the same effect. - Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group. - -font={font-name} *highlight-font* - font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim - runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: > - font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1 -< - The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font. - When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default - font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is - used). - The following only works with Motif, not with other GUIs: - When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed. - When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be - changed. - All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same - character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will - occur. - To use a font name with an embedded space or other special character, - put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then. - Example: > - :hi comment font='Monospace 10' - -guifg={color-name} *highlight-guifg* -guibg={color-name} *highlight-guibg* -guisp={color-name} *highlight-guisp* - These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special - (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl and - strikethrough. - There are a few special names: - NONE no color (transparent) *E1361* - bg use normal background color - background use normal background color - fg use normal foreground color - foreground use normal foreground color - To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character, - put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then. - Example: > - :hi comment guifg='salmon pink' -< - *gui-colors* - Suggested color names (these are available on most systems): - Red LightRed DarkRed - Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen - Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue - Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan - Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta - Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow - Gray LightGray DarkGray - Black White - Orange Purple Violet - - In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See - |win32-colors|. - - You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values. - The format is "#rrggbb", where - "rr" is the Red value - "gg" is the Green value - "bb" is the Blue value - All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: > - :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff -< - If you are authoring a color scheme and use the same hexadecimal value - repeatedly, you can define a name for it in |v:colornames|. For - example: > - - # provide a default value for this color but allow the user to - # override it. - :call extend(v:colornames, {'alt_turquoise': '#11f0c3'}, 'keep') - :highlight Comment guifg=alt_turquoise guibg=magenta -< - If you are using a color scheme that relies on named colors and you - would like to adjust the precise appearance of those colors, you can - do so by overriding the values in |v:colornames| prior to loading the - scheme: > - - let v:colornames['alt_turquoise'] = '#22f0d3' - colorscheme alt -< - If you want to develop a color list that can be relied on by others, - it is best to prefix your color names. By convention these color lists - are placed in the colors/lists directory. You can see an example in - '$VIMRUNTIME/colors/lists/csscolors.vim'. This list would be sourced - by a color scheme using: > - - :runtime colors/lists/csscolors.vim - :highlight Comment guifg=css_turquoise -< - - *highlight-groups* *highlight-default* -These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the -'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value -of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight" -command. -When possible the name is highlighted in the used colors. If this makes it -unreadable use Visual selection. - - *hl-ColorColumn* -ColorColumn Used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn'. - *hl-Conceal* -Conceal Placeholder characters substituted for concealed - text (see 'conceallevel'). - *hl-Cursor* *hl-lCursor* -Cursor Character under the cursor. -lCursor Character under the cursor when |language-mapping| - is used (see 'guicursor'). - *hl-CursorIM* -CursorIM Like Cursor, but used when in IME mode. |CursorIM| - *hl-CursorColumn* -CursorColumn Screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is set. - *hl-CursorLine* -CursorLine Screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is set. - *hl-Directory* -Directory Directory names (and other special names in listings). - *hl-DiffAdd* -DiffAdd Diff mode: Added line. |diff.txt| - *hl-DiffChange* -DiffChange Diff mode: Changed line. |diff.txt| - *hl-DiffDelete* -DiffDelete Diff mode: Deleted line. |diff.txt| - *hl-DiffText* -DiffText Diff mode: Changed text within a changed line. |diff.txt| - *hl-EndOfBuffer* -EndOfBuffer Filler lines (~) after the last line in the buffer. - By default, this is highlighted like |hl-NonText|. - *hl-ErrorMsg* -ErrorMsg Error messages on the command line. - *hl-VertSplit* -VertSplit Column separating vertically split windows. - *hl-Folded* -Folded Line used for closed folds. - *hl-FoldColumn* -FoldColumn 'foldcolumn' - *hl-SignColumn* -SignColumn Column where |signs| are displayed. - *hl-IncSearch* -IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with - ":s///c". - *hl-LineNr* -LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number' - or 'relativenumber' option is set. - *hl-LineNrAbove* -LineNrAbove Line number for when the 'relativenumber' - option is set, above the cursor line. - *hl-LineNrBelow* -LineNrBelow Line number for when the 'relativenumber' - option is set, below the cursor line. - *hl-CursorLineNr* -CursorLineNr Like LineNr when 'cursorline' is set and 'cursorlineopt' - contains "number" or is "both", for the cursor line. - *hl-CursorLineFold* -CursorLineFold Like FoldColumn when 'cursorline' is set for the cursor line. - *hl-CursorLineSign* -CursorLineSign Like SignColumn when 'cursorline' is set for the cursor line. - *hl-MatchParen* -MatchParen Character under the cursor or just before it, if it - is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt| - *hl-MessageWindow* -MessageWindow Messages popup window used by `:echowindow`. If not defined - |hl-WarningMsg| is used. - *hl-ModeMsg* -ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --"). - *hl-MoreMsg* -MoreMsg |more-prompt| - *hl-NonText* -NonText '@' at the end of the window, "<<<" at the start of the window - for 'smoothscroll', characters from 'showbreak' and other - characters that do not really exist in the text, such as the - ">" displayed when a double-wide character doesn't fit at the - end of the line. - *hl-Normal* -Normal Normal text. - *hl-Pmenu* -Pmenu Popup menu: Normal item. - *hl-PmenuSel* -PmenuSel Popup menu: Selected item. - *hl-PmenuKind* -PmenuKind Popup menu: Normal item "kind". - *hl-PmenuKindSel* -PmenuKindSel Popup menu: Selected item "kind". - *hl-PmenuExtra* -PmenuExtra Popup menu: Normal item "extra text". - *hl-PmenuExtraSel* -PmenuExtraSel Popup menu: Selected item "extra text". - *hl-PmenuSbar* -PmenuSbar Popup menu: Scrollbar. - *hl-PmenuThumb* -PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar. - *hl-PopupNotification* -PopupNotification - Popup window created with |popup_notification()|. If not - defined |hl-WarningMsg| is used. - *hl-Question* -Question |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions. - *hl-QuickFixLine* -QuickFixLine Current |quickfix| item in the quickfix window. - *hl-Search* -Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch'). - Also used for similar items that need to stand out. - *hl-CurSearch* -CurSearch Current match for the last search pattern (see 'hlsearch'). - Note: This is correct after a search, but may get outdated if - changes are made or the screen is redrawn. - *hl-SpecialKey* -SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used - to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'. - Generally: Text that is displayed differently from what it - really is. - *hl-SpellBad* -SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell| - This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. - *hl-SpellCap* -SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. |spell| - This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. - *hl-SpellLocal* -SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is - used in another region. |spell| - This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. - *hl-SpellRare* -SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is - hardly ever used. |spell| - This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. - *hl-StatusLine* -StatusLine Status line of current window. - *hl-StatusLineNC* -StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows - Note: If this is equal to "StatusLine", Vim will use "^^^" in - the status line of the current window. - *hl-StatusLineTerm* -StatusLineTerm Status line of current window, if it is a |terminal| window. - *hl-StatusLineTermNC* -StatusLineTermNC Status lines of not-current windows that is a - |terminal| window. - *hl-TabLine* -TabLine Tab pages line, not active tab page label. - *hl-TabLineFill* -TabLineFill Tab pages line, where there are no labels. - *hl-TabLineSel* -TabLineSel Tab pages line, active tab page label. - *hl-Terminal* -Terminal |terminal| window (see |terminal-size-color|). - *hl-Title* -Title Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc. - *hl-Visual* -Visual Visual mode selection. - *hl-VisualNOS* -VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection". - Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this. - *hl-WarningMsg* -WarningMsg Warning messages. - *hl-WildMenu* -WildMenu Current match in 'wildmenu' completion. - - *hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9* -The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the -statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9. - -For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu, -scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the -Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg, -and guifg. - - *hl-Menu* -Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus. - Also used for the toolbar. - Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg. - - NOTE: For Motif the font argument actually - specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is - empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when - set. - - *hl-Scrollbar* -Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's - scrollbars. - Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg. - - *hl-Tooltip* -Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips. - Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg. - - NOTE: For Motif the font argument actually - specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is - empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when - set. - -============================================================================== -15. Linking groups *:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413* - -When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you -can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight -group, and give the color attributes only for that group. - -To set a link: - - :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group} - -To remove a link: - - :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE - -Notes: *E414* -- If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You - don't get an error message for a non-existing group. -- As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is - removed. -- If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is - not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a - sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip - links for groups that already have settings. - - *:hi-default* *:highlight-default* -The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a -group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command -will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link. - -Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a -specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: > - :highlight default link cComment Comment -If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: > - :highlight link cComment Question -Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be -overruled when the syntax file is loaded. - -To have a link survive `:highlight clear`, which is useful if you have -highlighting for a specific filetype and you want to keep it when selecting -another color scheme, put a command like this in the -"after/syntax/{filetype}.vim" file: > - highlight! default link cComment Question - -============================================================================== -16. Cleaning up *:syn-clear* *E391* - -If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this -command: > - :syntax clear - -This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting, -or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed -in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that -load the syntax file. -The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is -loaded after this command. - -To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: > - :syntax clear {group-name} .. -This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}. - -To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: > - :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} .. -This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list. - - *:syntax-off* *:syn-off* -If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove -the autocommands that load the syntax files: > - :syntax off - -What this command actually does, is executing the command > - :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim -See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work -$VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See |$VIMRUNTIME|. - - *:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset* -If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the -defaults back: > - - :syntax reset - -It is a bit of a wrong name, since it does not reset any syntax items, it only -affects the highlighting. - -This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option. - -Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset -back to their Vim default. -Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color -scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost. - -What this actually does is: > - - let g:syntax_cmd = "reset" - runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim - -Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option. - - *syncolor* -If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim -script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in -'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule -the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax -reset" command. - -For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: > - - if &background == "light" - highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen - else - highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green - endif -< - *E679* -Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the -'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an -endless loop. - -Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether -your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This -depends on the color scheme file. See |:colorscheme|. - - *syntax_cmd* -The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the -syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded: - "on" `:syntax on` command. Highlight colors are overruled but - links are kept - "enable" `:syntax enable` command. Only define colors for groups that - don't have highlighting yet. Use `:highlight default` . - "reset" `:syntax reset` command or loading a color scheme. Define all - the colors. - "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a - syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set - them. - -============================================================================== -17. Highlighting tags *tag-highlight* - -If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following -mappings. - - <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags. - <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file. -> - :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]*:\)\=\([^ ]*\).*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12> - :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR> - -WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more -memory Vim will consume. - -Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you -must use Universal Ctags (found at https://ctags.io) or Exuberant ctags (found -at http://ctags.sf.net). - -Put these lines in your Makefile: - -# Make a highlight file for types. Requires Universal/Exuberant ctags and awk -types: types.vim -types.vim: *.[ch] - ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\ - awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\ - {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@ - -And put these lines in your .vimrc: > - - " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists - autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') .. '/types.vim' - autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname) - autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] exe 'so ' .. fname - autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif - -============================================================================== -18. Window-local syntax *:ownsyntax* - -Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is -possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own -private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source -with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source -highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold, -italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here. - -To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other -windows on the buffer: > - :ownsyntax foo -< *w:current_syntax* -This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo". The value of -"b:current_syntax" does not change. This is implemented by saving and -restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set -"b:current_syntax". The value set by the syntax file is assigned to -"w:current_syntax". -Note: This resets the 'spell', 'spellcapcheck' and 'spellfile' options. - -Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows -on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely, -syntax commands executed from that window do not affect other windows on the -same buffer. - -A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer -is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded. -When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax. - -============================================================================== -19. Color xterms *xterm-color* *color-xterm* - -Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the -default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: > - :if &term =~ "xterm" - : if has("terminfo") - : set t_Co=8 - : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm - : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm - : else - : set t_Co=8 - : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm - : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm - : endif - :endif -< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] - -You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal, -e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm". - -Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may -be wrong. - *xiterm* *rxvt* -The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too. -But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: > - :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm - :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm -< - *colortest.vim* -To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution. -To use it, execute this command: > - :runtime syntax/colortest.vim - -Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can -output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined -at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground -colors, when 't_Co' is 8. - - *xfree-xterm* -To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be -included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version -at: > - http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html -Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the -termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it -supports. > - ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query -If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings. -(Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding). - -This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): > - :if has("terminfo") - : set t_Co=16 - : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm - : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm - :else - : set t_Co=16 - : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm - : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm - :endif -< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] - -Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically -translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm". -Colors above 16 are also translated automatically. - -For 256 colors this has been reported to work: > - - :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm - :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm - -Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color" -and try if that works. - -You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file): - XTerm*color0: #000000 - XTerm*color1: #c00000 - XTerm*color2: #008000 - XTerm*color3: #808000 - XTerm*color4: #0000c0 - XTerm*color5: #c000c0 - XTerm*color6: #008080 - XTerm*color7: #c0c0c0 - XTerm*color8: #808080 - XTerm*color9: #ff6060 - XTerm*color10: #00ff00 - XTerm*color11: #ffff00 - XTerm*color12: #8080ff - XTerm*color13: #ff40ff - XTerm*color14: #00ffff - XTerm*color15: #ffffff - Xterm*cursorColor: Black - -[Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the -cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a -newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.] - -To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database -Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): > - xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults -< - *xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor* -To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas -Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with -these resources: - XTerm*cursorBlink: on - XTerm*cursorOnTime: 400 - XTerm*cursorOffTime: 250 - XTerm*cursorColor: White - - *hpterm-color* -These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8 -foreground colors: > - :if has("terminfo") - : set t_Co=8 - : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS - : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S - :else - : set t_Co=8 - : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS - : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S - :endif -< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] - - *Eterm* *enlightened-terminal* -These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal -emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the -bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. > - :set t_Co=16 - :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m - :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m -< - *TTpro-telnet* -These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware / -open-source program for MS-Windows. > - set t_Co=16 - set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm - set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm -Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure -that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled. -(info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>) - - -============================================================================== -20. When syntax is slow *:syntime* - -This is aimed at authors of a syntax file. - -If your syntax causes redrawing to be slow, here are a few hints on making it -faster. To see slowness switch on some features that usually interfere, such -as 'relativenumber' and |folding|. - -Note: This is only available when compiled with the |+profile| feature. -You many need to build Vim with "huge" features. - -To find out what patterns are consuming most time, get an overview with this -sequence: > - :syntime on - [ redraw the text at least once with CTRL-L ] - :syntime report - -This will display a list of syntax patterns that were used, sorted by the time -it took to match them against the text. - -:syntime on Start measuring syntax times. This will add some - overhead to compute the time spent on syntax pattern - matching. - -:syntime off Stop measuring syntax times. - -:syntime clear Set all the counters to zero, restart measuring. - -:syntime report Show the syntax items used since ":syntime on" in the - current window. Use a wider display to see more of - the output. - - The list is sorted by total time. The columns are: - TOTAL Total time in seconds spent on - matching this pattern. - COUNT Number of times the pattern was used. - MATCH Number of times the pattern actually - matched - SLOWEST The longest time for one try. - AVERAGE The average time for one try. - NAME Name of the syntax item. Note that - this is not unique. - PATTERN The pattern being used. - -Pattern matching gets slow when it has to try many alternatives. Try to -include as much literal text as possible to reduce the number of ways a -pattern does NOT match. - -When using the "\@<=" and "\@<!" items, add a maximum size to avoid trying at -all positions in the current and previous line. For example, if the item is -literal text specify the size of that text (in bytes): - -"<\@<=span" Matches "span" in "<span". This tries matching with "<" in - many places. -"<\@1<=span" Matches the same, but only tries one byte before "span". - - - vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: +*syntax.txt* For Vim version 9.0. Last change: 2023 Apr 24 + + + VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar + + +Syntax highlighting *syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring* + +Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or +color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim +doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its +limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody +calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that. + +Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary +terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the +GUI version, gvim. + +In the User Manual: +|usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting. +|usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file. + +1. Quick start |:syn-qstart| +2. Syntax files |:syn-files| +3. Syntax loading procedure |syntax-loading| +4. Converting to HTML |2html.vim| +5. Syntax file remarks |:syn-file-remarks| +6. Defining a syntax |:syn-define| +7. :syntax arguments |:syn-arguments| +8. Syntax patterns |:syn-pattern| +9. Syntax clusters |:syn-cluster| +10. Including syntax files |:syn-include| +11. Synchronizing |:syn-sync| +12. Listing syntax items |:syntax| +13. Colorschemes |color-schemes| +14. Highlight command |:highlight| +15. Linking groups |:highlight-link| +16. Cleaning up |:syn-clear| +17. Highlighting tags |tag-highlight| +18. Window-local syntax |:ownsyntax| +19. Color xterms |xterm-color| +20. When syntax is slow |:syntime| + +{Vi does not have any of these commands} + +Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been +disabled at compile time. + +============================================================================== +1. Quick start *:syn-qstart* + + *:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable* +This command switches on syntax highlighting: > + + :syntax enable + +What this command actually does is to execute the command > + :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim + +If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find +the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|). Usually this works just +fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the +directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files +are in the "/usr/vim/vim82/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to +"/usr/vim/vim82". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim. +This command also sources the |menu.vim| script when the GUI is running or +will start soon. See |'go-M'| about avoiding that. + + *:syn-on* *:syntax-on* +The `:syntax enable` command will keep most of your current color settings. +This allows using `:highlight` commands to set your preferred colors before or +after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the +defaults, use: > + :syntax on +< + *:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal* +If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background +with: > + :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White +For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|. +For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|. + +NOTE: The syntax files on MS-Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>. +The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of +file for your system. Although on MS-Windows the right format is +automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty. + +NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value +of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after +reading the |gvimrc|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be +used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on +highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: > + + :gui " open window and set default for 'background' + :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors + +NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the +foreground! Use ":gui -f" then. + + *g:syntax_on* +You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command: > + :if exists("g:syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif + +To put this into a mapping, you can use: > + :map <F7> :if exists("g:syntax_on") <Bar> + \ syntax off <Bar> + \ else <Bar> + \ syntax enable <Bar> + \ endif <CR> +[using the |<>| notation, type this literally] + +Details: +The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how +this works, look in the file: + command file ~ + :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim + :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim + :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim + :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim +Also see |syntax-loading|. + +NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting +makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value. + +============================================================================== +2. Syntax files *:syn-files* + +The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in +a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the +name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters, +a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem). +Examples: + c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim + cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim + +The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But +the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a +language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one, +for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: > + :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim + +The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: > + :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim + :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim +These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim. + + +MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES *mysyntaxfile* + +When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these +automatically with ":syntax enable", do this: + +1. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item + of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: > + mkdir ~/.vim + +2. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: > + mkdir ~/.vim/syntax + +3. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write + it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: > + :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim + +Now you can start using your syntax file manually: > + :set syntax=mine +You don't have to exit Vim to use this. + +If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|. + +If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user +to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'. + + +ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-add* + +If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to +add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps: + +1. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above. + +2. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: > + mkdir ~/.vim/after + mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax + +3. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For + example, to change the colors for the C syntax: > + highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green + +4. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the + syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: > + :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim + +That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be +different. You don't even have to restart Vim. + +If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name. +All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example: + ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim + ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim + + +REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-replace* + +If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new +version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above. Just make sure +that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'. +Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets +b:current_syntax. + + +NAMING CONVENTIONS *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18* + +A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of +thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color. +A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself. + +The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits +and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*". However, Vim does not give +an error when using other characters. The maximum length of a group name is +about 200 bytes. *E1249* + +To be able to allow each user to pick their favorite set of colors, there must +be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages. +These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly +you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"): + + *Comment any comment + + *Constant any constant + String a string constant: "this is a string" + Character a character constant: 'c', '\n' + Number a number constant: 234, 0xff + Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false + Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10 + + *Identifier any variable name + Function function name (also: methods for classes) + + *Statement any statement + Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc. + Repeat for, do, while, etc. + Label case, default, etc. + Operator "sizeof", "+", "*", etc. + Keyword any other keyword + Exception try, catch, throw + + *PreProc generic Preprocessor + Include preprocessor #include + Define preprocessor #define + Macro same as Define + PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc. + + *Type int, long, char, etc. + StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc. + Structure struct, union, enum, etc. + Typedef A typedef + + *Special any special symbol + SpecialChar special character in a constant + Tag you can use CTRL-] on this + Delimiter character that needs attention + SpecialComment special things inside a comment + Debug debugging statements + + *Underlined text that stands out, HTML links + + *Ignore left blank, hidden |hl-Ignore| + + *Error any erroneous construct + + *Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the + keywords TODO FIXME and XXX + +The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups. +For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting. +The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same +highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands +after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file. + +Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string" +can be used for the same group. + +The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name: + NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained + + *hl-Ignore* +When using the Ignore group, you may also consider using the conceal +mechanism. See |conceal|. + +============================================================================== +3. Syntax loading procedure *syntax-loading* + +This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is +issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are +located. This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|. + +":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following: + + Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim + | + +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim + | + +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath' + | | + | +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is + | | defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise + | | ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules + | | existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't + | | set yet. + | | + | +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when + | | the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1* + | | + | +- Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable. + | This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2* + | + +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any + | filetype.vim files found. It should always Source + | $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following. + | | + | +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option + | | This is where the connection between file name and file type is + | | made for known file types. *synload-3* + | | + | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile* + | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. + | | *synload-4* + | | + | +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file + | | type was detected yet. *synload-5* + | | + | +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim| + | + +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file + | type has been detected. *synload-6* + | + +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each + already loaded buffer. + + +Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows: + + Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands. + | + +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from |synload-3| + | (known file types) or |synload-4| (user's file types), the 'filetype' + | option is set to the file type. + | + +- The autocommand at |synload-5| is triggered. If the file type was not + | found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This + | should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following. + | | + | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myscriptsfile* + | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. + | | + | +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file, + | again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the + | file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'. + | + +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this + | triggers the FileType autocommand |synload-6| above. It sets + | 'syntax' to the determined file type. + | + +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand + | from |synload-1| (and |synload-2|). This find the main syntax file in + | 'runtimepath', with this command: + | runtime! syntax/<name>.vim + | + +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are + triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific + syntax. + +============================================================================== +4. Conversion to HTML *2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML* + +2html is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current +window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file. + +After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The +colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. With +|g:html_line_ids| you can jump to specific lines by adding (for example) #L123 +or #123 to the end of the URL in your browser's address bar. And with +|g:html_dynamic_folds| enabled, you can show or hide the text that is folded +in Vim. + +You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"! +Source the script to convert the current file: > + + :runtime! syntax/2html.vim +< +Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off +options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to +the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using +|:unlet|. + +Remarks: +- Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors. +- From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)! +- The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some + features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be + incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in. + +Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a +Unix shell: > + for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done +< + *g:html_start_line* *g:html_end_line* +To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml| +command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first +and last line to be converted. Example, using the last set Visual area: > + + :let g:html_start_line = line("'<") + :let g:html_end_line = line("'>") + :runtime! syntax/2html.vim +< + *:TOhtml* +:[range]TOhtml The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin. + This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a + range is given, this command sets |g:html_start_line| + and |g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the + range, respectively. Default range is the entire + buffer. + + If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless + |g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert + all windows which are part of the diff in the current + tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element + in the generated HTML. With |g:html_line_ids| you can + jump to lines in specific windows with (for example) + #W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or + #W3L87 for line 87 in the third. + + Examples: > + + :10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html + :'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection + :TOhtml " convert entire buffer +< + *g:html_diff_one_file* +Default: 0. +When 0, and using |:TOhtml| all windows involved in a |diff| in the current tab +page are converted to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element. When +1, only the current buffer is converted. +Example: > + + let g:html_diff_one_file = 1 +< + *g:html_whole_filler* +Default: 0. +When 0, if |g:html_diff_one_file| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines +is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number +of inserted lines. +When 1, always display all inserted lines as if |g:html_diff_one_file| were +not set. +> + :let g:html_whole_filler = 1 +< + *TOhtml-performance* *g:html_no_progress* +Default: 0. +When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the +2html.vim conversion process. +When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement +but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big +files it can take a long time! +Example: > + + let g:html_no_progress = 1 +< +You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not +run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script +moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: > + + vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c +< +Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you +need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML +conversion. See |-E| and |-s-ex| for details. It is probably best to create a +script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of +specifying each command separately. + + *hl-TOhtmlProgress* *TOhtml-progress-color* +When displayed, the progress bar will show colored boxes along the statusline +as the HTML conversion proceeds. By default, the background color as the +current "DiffDelete" highlight group is used. If "DiffDelete" and "StatusLine" +have the same background color, TOhtml will automatically adjust the color to +differ. If you do not like the automatically selected colors, you can define +your own highlight colors for the progress bar. Example: > + + hi TOhtmlProgress guifg=#c0ffee ctermbg=7 +< + *g:html_number_lines* +Default: Current 'number' setting. +When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering. +When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same +highlighting as the line number column in Vim (|hl-LineNr|). +Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: > + :let g:html_number_lines = 1 +Force to omit the line numbers: > + :let g:html_number_lines = 0 +Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: > + :unlet g:html_number_lines +< + *g:html_line_ids* +Default: 1 if |g:html_number_lines| is set, 0 otherwise. +When 1, adds an HTML id attribute to each line number, or to an empty <span> +inserted for that purpose if no line numbers are shown. This ID attribute +takes the form of L123 for single-buffer HTML pages, or W2L123 for diff-view +pages, and is used to jump to a specific line (in a specific window of a diff +view). Javascript is inserted to open any closed dynamic folds +(|g:html_dynamic_folds|) containing the specified line before jumping. The +javascript also allows omitting the window ID in the url, and the leading L. +For example: > + + page.html#L123 jumps to line 123 in a single-buffer file + page.html#123 does the same + + diff.html#W1L42 jumps to line 42 in the first window in a diff + diff.html#42 does the same +< + *g:html_use_css* +Default: 1. +When 1, generate valid HTML 5 markup with CSS styling, supported in all modern +browsers and many old browsers. +When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not +recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients, +forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable. +Example: > + :let g:html_use_css = 0 +< + *g:html_ignore_conceal* +Default: 0. +When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character +from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current +value of 'conceallevel'. +When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is +|conceal|ed. + +Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is +included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): > + :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1 + :setl conceallevel=0 +< + *g:html_ignore_folding* +Default: 0. +When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in +Vim (|fold-foldtext|). See |g:html_dynamic_folds| if you also want to allow +the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside. +When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the +text is in a fold has no impact at all. |g:html_dynamic_folds| has no effect. + +Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included +in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): > + zR + :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1 +< + *g:html_dynamic_folds* +Default: 0. +When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML. +When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like +in Vim. + +Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling, +regardless of what |g:html_use_css| is set to. + +This variable is ignored when |g:html_ignore_folding| is set. +> + :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1 +< + *g:html_no_foldcolumn* +Default: 0. +When 0, if |g:html_dynamic_folds| is 1, generate a column of text similar to +Vim's foldcolumn (|fold-foldcolumn|) the user can click on to toggle folds +open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current +'foldcolumn' setting. +When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over +folded text will open the fold as if |g:html_hover_unfold| were set. +> + :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1 +< + *TOhtml-uncopyable-text* *g:html_prevent_copy* +Default: Empty string. +This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied, +when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful +for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or +line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be +affected in this way as follows: + f: fold column + n: line numbers (also within fold text) + t: fold text + d: diff filler + +Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: > + :let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn" +< +The method used to prevent copying in the generated page depends on the value +of |g:html_use_input_for_pc|. + + *g:html_use_input_for_pc* +Default: "fallback" +If |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty, then: + +When "all", read-only <input> elements are used in place of normal text for +uncopyable regions. In some browsers, especially older browsers, after +selecting an entire page and copying the selection, the <input> tags are not +pasted with the page text. If |g:html_no_invalid| is 0, the <input> tags have +invalid type; this works in more browsers, but the page will not validate. +Note: This method does NOT work in recent versions of Chrome and equivalent +browsers; the <input> tags get pasted with the text. + +When "fallback" (default value), the same <input> elements are generated for +older browsers, but newer browsers (detected by CSS feature query) hide the +<input> elements and instead use generated content in an ::before pseudoelement +to display the uncopyable text. This method should work with the largest +number of browsers, both old and new. + +When "none", the <input> elements are not generated at all. Only the +generated-content method is used. This means that old browsers, notably +Internet Explorer, will either copy the text intended not to be copyable, or +the non-copyable text may not appear at all. However, this is the most +standards-based method, and there will be much less markup. + + *g:html_no_invalid* +Default: 0. +When 0, if |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty and |g:html_use_input_for_pc| is +not "none", an invalid attribute is intentionally inserted into the <input> +element for the uncopyable areas. This prevents pasting the <input> elements +in some applications. Specifically, some versions of Microsoft Word will not +paste the <input> elements if they contain this invalid attribute. When 1, no +invalid markup is inserted, and the generated page should validate. However, +<input> elements may be pasted into some applications and can be difficult to +remove afterward. + + *g:html_hover_unfold* +Default: 0. +When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with +|g:html_dynamic_folds| set, is to click on the generated fold column. +When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse +cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with +disabled javascript to view the folded text. + +Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this +feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the +normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but +they will not be openable without a foldcolumn. +> + :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1 +< + *g:html_id_expr* +Default: "" +Dynamic folding and jumping to line IDs rely on unique IDs within the document +to work. If generated HTML is copied into a larger document, these IDs are no +longer guaranteed to be unique. Set g:html_id_expr to an expression Vim can +evaluate to get a unique string to append to each ID used in a given document, +so that the full IDs will be unique even when combined with other content in a +larger HTML document. Example, to append _ and the buffer number to each ID: > + + :let g:html_id_expr = '"_" .. bufnr("%")' +< +To append a string "_mystring" to the end of each ID: > + + :let g:html_id_expr = '"_mystring"' +< +Note: When converting a diff view to HTML, the expression will only be +evaluated for the first window in the diff, and the result used for all the +windows. + + *TOhtml-wrap-text* *g:html_pre_wrap* +Default: Current 'wrap' setting. +When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does +not wrap at the edge of the browser window. +When 1, if |g:html_use_css| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is +used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser +window. +Explicitly enable text wrapping: > + :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1 +Explicitly disable wrapping: > + :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0 +Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: > + :unlet g:html_pre_wrap +< + *g:html_no_pre* +Default: 0. +When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre> +tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab +characters can be included literally (see |g:html_expand_tabs|). +When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is +used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of character +references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow +text in the generated HTML is wrap (see |g:html_pre_wrap|) which also works in +old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and +the rendered page generated by 2html.vim. +> + :let g:html_no_pre = 1 +< + *g:html_no_doc* +Default: 0. +When 1 it doesn't generate a full HTML document with a DOCTYPE, <head>, +<body>, etc. If |g:html_use_css| is enabled (the default) you'll have to +define the CSS manually. The |g:html_dynamic_folds| and |g:html_line_ids| +settings (off by default) also insert some JavaScript. + + + *g:html_no_links* +Default: 0. +Don't generate <a> tags for text that looks like an URL. + + *g:html_no_modeline* +Default: 0. +Don't generate a modeline disabling folding. + + *g:html_expand_tabs* +Default: 0 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, 'vartabstop' is not in use, + and no fold column or line numbers occur in the generated HTML; + 1 otherwise. +When 1, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate +number of space characters, or references if |g:html_no_pre| is 1. +When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text +are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to +allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in +the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and +indentation in the HTML, unless set by default. + +Force |2html.vim| to keep <Tab> characters: > + :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0 +< +Force tabs to be expanded: > + :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1 +< + *TOhtml-encoding-detect* *TOhtml-encoding* +It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with +|g:html_use_encoding| for any content which will be placed on a web server. + +If you do not specify an encoding, |2html.vim| uses the preferred IANA name +for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not. +'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be +set to match the chosen document encoding. + +Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in +|encoding-names|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with +wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific +encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options +below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names. + +Note: By default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in +the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C: + + http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings + http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark + + *g:html_use_encoding* +Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above. +To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the +name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to +something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a +webserver: > + :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8" +You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset +entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): > + :let g:html_use_encoding = "" +To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the |g:html_use_encoding| +variable: > + :unlet g:html_use_encoding +< + *g:html_encoding_override* +Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings + mentioned by name at |encoding-names|. +This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you +specify an encoding with |g:html_use_encoding| which is not in the default +list of conversions. + +This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing +pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs. + +Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": > + :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'} +< + *g:html_charset_override* +Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings + mentioned by name at |encoding-names| and which have wide + browser support. +This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the HTML charset for any +'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also +use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example, +TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16 +and UTF-32 instead, use: > + :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'} + +Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known +compatibility problems with some major browsers. + + *g:html_font* +Default: "monospace" +You can specify the font or fonts used in the converted document using +g:html_font. If this option is set to a string, then the value will be +surrounded with single quotes. If this option is set to a list then each list +item is surrounded by single quotes and the list is joined with commas. Either +way, "monospace" is added as the fallback generic family name and the entire +result used as the font family (using CSS) or font face (if not using CSS). +Examples: > + + " font-family: 'Consolas', monospace; + :let g:html_font = "Consolas" + + " font-family: 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Consolas', monospace; + :let g:html_font = ["DejaVu Sans Mono", "Consolas"] +< + *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml* +Default: 0. +When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible). +When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML). +> + :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1 +< +============================================================================== +5. Syntax file remarks *:syn-file-remarks* + + *b:current_syntax-variable* +Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the +"b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other +settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: > + :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh" + :au BufReadPost * do-some-things + :au BufReadPost * endif + + + +ABEL *abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax* + +ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign +any value to the respective variable. Example: > + :let abel_obsolete_ok=1 +To disable them use ":unlet". Example: > + :unlet abel_obsolete_ok + +Variable Highlight ~ +abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors +abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader + + +ADA + +See |ft-ada-syntax| + + +ANT *ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax* + +The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python +by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed +by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument +and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: > + + :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim') + +will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code > + + <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[ + # everything inside is highlighted as perl + ]]></script> + +See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently. + + +APACHE *apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax* + +The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting for Apache HTTP server +version 2.2.3. + + + *asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k* +ASSEMBLY *ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax* + *ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim* + +Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection +doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your +startup vimrc: > + :let filetype_i = "asm" +Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use. + +There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name +extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a +line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax +files are included: + asm GNU assembly (the default) + asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly + asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly + ia64 Intel Itanium 64 + fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net) + masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86) + nasm Netwide assembly + tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and + MMX) + pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84) + +The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: > + asmsyntax=nasm +Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be +one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be +immediately before or after this text. Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is +equivalent to setting ft=foo in a |modeline|, and that in case of a conflict +between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in +particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax +highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax). + +The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the +b:asmsyntax variable: > + :let b:asmsyntax = "nasm" + +If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of +the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly +language: > + :let asmsyntax = "nasm" + +As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used. + + +Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~ + +To enable a feature: > + :let {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm +To disable a feature: > + :unlet {variable} |set syntax=nasm + +Variable Highlight ~ +nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error + (parser dependent; not recommended) +nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error +nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo + + +ASPPERL and ASPVBS *ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax* + +*.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's +hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are +using. For Perl script use: > + :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl" + :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl" +For Visual Basic use: > + :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs" + :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs" + + +BAAN *baan.vim* *baan-syntax* + +The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV up to SSA ERP LN +for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants +are supported. + +Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify +in ones |.vimrc|: > + let baan_code_stds=1 + +*baan-folding* + +Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables +mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on +source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive. + +To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: > + let baan_fold=1 +Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The +indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not +considered equal to a tab). > + let baan_fold_block=1 +Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO, +SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to +match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). > + let baan_fold_sql=1 +Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set| +the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in +.../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: > + set foldminlines=5 + set foldnestmax=6 + + +BASIC *basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax* + +Both Visual Basic and "normal" BASIC use the extension ".bas". To detect +which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first +five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic", +otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual +Basic. + +If the automatic detection doesn't work for you or you only edit, for +example, FreeBASIC files, use this in your startup vimrc: > + :let filetype_bas = "freebasic" + + +C *c.vim* *ft-c-syntax* + +A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value +(including zero) to the respective variable. Example: > + :let c_comment_strings = 1 + :let c_no_bracket_error = 0 +To disable them use `:unlet`. Example: > + :unlet c_comment_strings +Setting the value to zero doesn't work! + +An alternative is to switch to the C++ highlighting: > + :set filetype=cpp + +Variable Highlight ~ +*c_gnu* GNU gcc specific items +*c_comment_strings* strings and numbers inside a comment +*c_space_errors* trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab> +*c_no_trail_space_error* ... but no trailing spaces +*c_no_tab_space_error* ... but no spaces before a <Tab> +*c_no_bracket_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors +*c_no_curly_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors; + except { and } in first column + Default is to highlight them, otherwise you + can't spot a missing ")". +*c_curly_error* highlight a missing } by finding all pairs; this + forces syncing from the start of the file, can be slow +*c_no_ansi* don't do standard ANSI types and constants +*c_ansi_typedefs* ... but do standard ANSI types +*c_ansi_constants* ... but do standard ANSI constants +*c_no_utf* don't highlight \u and \U in strings +*c_syntax_for_h* for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc + syntax instead of objcpp +*c_no_if0* don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments +*c_no_cformat* don't highlight %-formats in strings +*c_no_c99* don't highlight C99 standard items +*c_no_c11* don't highlight C11 standard items +*c_no_bsd* don't highlight BSD specific types + +When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will +become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: > + :let c_no_comment_fold = 1 +"#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: > + :let c_no_if0_fold = 1 + +If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed +when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable +to a larger number: > + :let c_minlines = 100 +This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first +displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The +disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow. + +When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only +works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If +you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly. + +To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster. +Example: > + :au Syntax c call MyCadd() + :function MyCadd() + : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni + : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem + : hi link cMyItem Title + :endfun + +ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes +"NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is +not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant +highlighting: > + :hi link cConstant NONE + +If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the +highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket. + +If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file +in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be +~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. > + syn sync fromstart + set foldmethod=syntax + +CH *ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax* + +C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon +the C syntax file. See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C. + +By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead +of C or C++: > + :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1 + + +CHILL *chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax* + +Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See |c.vim| for all the settings +that are available. Additionally there is: + +chill_space_errors like c_space_errors +chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings +chill_minlines like c_minlines + + +CHANGELOG *changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax* + +ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line. +If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: > + let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0 +This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use +"b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax +file). + +You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: > + :hi link ChangelogError Error +Or to avoid the highlighting: > + :hi link ChangelogError NONE +This works immediately. + + +CLOJURE *ft-clojure-syntax* + + *g:clojure_syntax_keywords* + +Syntax highlighting of public vars in "clojure.core" is provided by default, +but additional symbols can be highlighted by adding them to the +|g:clojure_syntax_keywords| variable. The value should be a |Dictionary| of +syntax group names, each containing a |List| of identifiers. +> + let g:clojure_syntax_keywords = { + \ 'clojureMacro': ["defproject", "defcustom"], + \ 'clojureFunc': ["string/join", "string/replace"] + \ } +< +Refer to the Clojure syntax script for valid syntax group names. + +There is also *b:clojure_syntax_keywords* which is a buffer-local variant of +this variable intended for use by plugin authors to highlight symbols +dynamically. + +By setting the *b:clojure_syntax_without_core_keywords* variable, vars from +"clojure.core" will not be highlighted by default. This is useful for +namespaces that have set `(:refer-clojure :only [])` + + + *g:clojure_fold* + +Setting |g:clojure_fold| to `1` will enable the folding of Clojure code. Any +list, vector or map that extends over more than one line can be folded using +the standard Vim |fold-commands|. + + + *g:clojure_discard_macro* + +Set this variable to `1` to enable basic highlighting of Clojure's "discard +reader macro". +> + #_(defn foo [x] + (println x)) +< +Note that this option will not correctly highlight stacked discard macros +(e.g. `#_#_`). + + +COBOL *cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax* + +COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh +development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance +versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting, +add this line to your .vimrc: > + :let cobol_legacy_code = 1 +To disable it again, use this: > + :unlet cobol_legacy_code + + +COLD FUSION *coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax* + +The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion +comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > + + :let html_wrong_comments = 1 + +The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file. + + +CPP *cpp.vim* *ft-cpp-syntax* + +Most things are the same as |ft-c-syntax|. + +Variable Highlight ~ +cpp_no_cpp11 don't highlight C++11 standard items +cpp_no_cpp14 don't highlight C++14 standard items +cpp_no_cpp17 don't highlight C++17 standard items +cpp_no_cpp20 don't highlight C++20 standard items + + +CSH *csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax* + +This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually +used. + +Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems +symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish +between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the +"filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: *g:filetype_csh* +> + :let g:filetype_csh = "csh" + +For using tcsh: > + + :let g:filetype_csh = "tcsh" + +Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc, +tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts +will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the +"filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the +variable. + + +CYNLIB *cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax* + +Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable +hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc +or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a +normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this +line to your .vimrc file: > + + :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1 + +Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) > + + :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1 + +To disable these again, use this: > + + :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc + :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp +< + +CWEB *cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax* + +Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection +doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your +startup vimrc: > + :let filetype_w = "cweb" + + +DART *dart.vim* *ft-dart-syntax* + +Dart is an object-oriented, typed, class defined, garbage collected language +used for developing mobile, desktop, web, and back-end applications. Dart uses +a C-like syntax derived from C, Java, and JavaScript, with features adopted +from Smalltalk, Python, Ruby, and others. + +More information about the language and its development environment at the +official Dart language website at https://dart.dev + +dart.vim syntax detects and highlights Dart statements, reserved words, +type declarations, storage classes, conditionals, loops, interpolated values, +and comments. There is no support idioms from Flutter or any other Dart +framework. + +Changes, fixes? Submit an issue or pull request via: + +https://github.com/pr3d4t0r/dart-vim-syntax/ + + +DESKTOP *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax* + +Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files +according to freedesktop.org standard: +https://specifications.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/ +To highlight nonstandard extensions that does not begin with X-, set > + let g:desktop_enable_nonstd = 1 +Note that this may cause wrong highlight. +To highlight KDE-reserved features, set > + let g:desktop_enable_kde = 1 +g:desktop_enable_kde follows g:desktop_enable_nonstd if not supplied + + +DIFF *diff.vim* + +The diff highlighting normally finds translated headers. This can be slow if +there are very long lines in the file. To disable translations: > + + :let diff_translations = 0 + +Also see |diff-slow|. + + +DIRCOLORS *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax* + +The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to +provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of +the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most +versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and +uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following +line to your startup file: > + let dircolors_is_slackware = 1 + + +DOCBOOK *docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook* +DOCBOOK XML *docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax* +DOCBOOK SGML *docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax* + +There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you +are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you +automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type +defaults to XML. +You can set the type manually: > + :let docbk_type = "sgml" +or: > + :let docbk_type = "xml" +You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated. +Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": > + :set filetype=docbksgml +or: > + :set filetype=docbkxml + +You can specify the DocBook version: > + :let docbk_ver = 3 +When not set 4 is used. + + +DOSBATCH *dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax* + +Select the set of Windows Command interpreter extensions that should be +supported with the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For versions of Windows +NT (before Windows 2000) this should have the value of 1. For Windows 2000 +and later it should be 2. +Select the version you want with the following line: > + + :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1 + +If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support +Windows 2000 and later. + +The original MS-DOS supports an idiom of using a double colon (::) as an +alternative way to enter a comment line. This idiom can be used with the +current Windows Command Interpreter, but it can lead to problems when used +inside ( ... ) command blocks. You can find a discussion about this on +Stack Overflow - + +https://stackoverflow.com/questions/12407800/which-comment-style-should-i-use-in-batch-files + +To allow the use of the :: idiom for comments in the Windows Command +Interpreter or working with MS-DOS bat files, set the +dosbatch_colons_comment variable to anything: > + + :let dosbatch_colons_comment = 1 + +There is an option that covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type +"dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter +is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: > + + :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1 + +If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected. + + +DOXYGEN *doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax* + +Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format +(similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp, +idl and php files, and should also work with java. + +There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done +explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file. +Example: > + :set syntax=c.doxygen +or > + // vim:syntax=c.doxygen + +It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting +the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by +adding the following to your .vimrc. > + :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1 + +There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, +and are to do with non-standard highlighting options. + +Variable Default Effect ~ +g:doxygen_enhanced_color +g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for + doxygen comments. + +doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic + and html_my_rendering underline. + +doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief + colour highlighting. + +doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending + punctuation of brief + +There are also some highlight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in +configuration. + +Highlight Effect ~ +doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing + punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section +doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the + \endlink from a \link section. + + +DTD *dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax* + +The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable +case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > + + :let dtd_ignore_case=1 + +The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If +this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: > + + :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1 + +before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file. +Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the +'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'. +Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant' +highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the +delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: > + + :let dtd_no_param_entities=1 + +The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's. + + +EIFFEL *eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax* + +While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the +syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to +highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive +highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > + + :let eiffel_ignore_case=1 + +Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments. + +Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: > + + :let eiffel_strict=1 + :let eiffel_pedantic=1 + +Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the +five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and +"NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names. + +Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style +guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and +lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords). + +If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void", +"Result", and "Precursor", you can use > + + :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1 + +instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off. + +Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already +experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: > + + :let eiffel_ise=1 + +Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add > + + :let eiffel_hex_constants=1 + +to your startup file. + + +EUPHORIA *euphoria3.vim* *euphoria4.vim* *ft-euphoria-syntax* + +Two syntax highlighting files exist for Euphoria. One for Euphoria +version 3.1.1, which is the default syntax highlighting file, and one for +Euphoria version 4.0.5 or later. + +Euphoria version 3.1.1 (http://www.rapideuphoria.com/) is still necessary +for developing applications for the DOS platform, which Euphoria version 4 +(http://www.openeuphoria.org/) does not support. + +The following file extensions are auto-detected as Euphoria file type: + + *.e, *.eu, *.ew, *.ex, *.exu, *.exw + *.E, *.EU, *.EW, *.EX, *.EXU, *.EXW + +To select syntax highlighting file for Euphoria, as well as for +auto-detecting the *.e and *.E file extensions as Euphoria file type, +add the following line to your startup file: > + + :let g:filetype_euphoria = "euphoria3" + +< or > + + :let g:filetype_euphoria = "euphoria4" + +Elixir and Euphoria share the *.ex file extension. If the filetype is +specifically set as Euphoria with the g:filetype_euphoria variable, or the +file is determined to be Euphoria based on keywords in the file, then the +filetype will be set as Euphoria. Otherwise, the filetype will default to +Elixir. + + +ERLANG *erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax* + +Erlang is a functional programming language developed by Ericsson. Files with +the following extensions are recognized as Erlang files: erl, hrl, yaws. + +The BIFs (built-in functions) are highlighted by default. To disable this, +put the following line in your vimrc: > + + :let g:erlang_highlight_bifs = 0 + +To enable highlighting some special atoms, put this in your vimrc: > + + :let g:erlang_highlight_special_atoms = 1 + + +ELIXIR *elixir.vim* *ft-elixir-syntax* + +Elixir is a dynamic, functional language for building scalable and +maintainable applications. + +The following file extensions are auto-detected as Elixir file types: + + *.ex, *.exs, *.eex, *.leex, *.lock + +Elixir and Euphoria share the *.ex file extension. If the filetype is +specifically set as Euphoria with the g:filetype_euphoria variable, or the +file is determined to be Euphoria based on keywords in the file, then the +filetype will be set as Euphoria. Otherwise, the filetype will default to +Elixir. + + +FLEXWIKI *flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax* + +FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com +NOTE: This site currently doesn't work, on Wikipedia is mentioned that +development stopped in 2009. + +Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki +syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make +editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the +start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length), +'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak' +(to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen), +and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default. + +If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys +move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: > + :let flexwiki_maps = 1 + + +FORM *form.vim* *ft-form-syntax* + +The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default +modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String, +following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by +J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991. + +If you want to include your own changes to the default colors, you have to +redefine the following syntax groups: + + - formConditional + - formNumber + - formStatement + - formHeaderStatement + - formComment + - formPreProc + - formDirective + - formType + - formString + +Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and +directives per default in the same syntax group. + +A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between +header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate +this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file > + + :let form_enhanced_color=1 + +The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark +gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and +conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction. + +Both Visual Basic and FORM use the extension ".frm". To detect which one +should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first five lines of +the file. If it is found, filetype will be "vb", otherwise "form". + +If the automatic detection doesn't work for you or you only edit, for +example, FORM files, use this in your startup vimrc: > + :let filetype_frm = "form" + + +FORTH *forth.vim* *ft-forth-syntax* + +Files matching "*.fs" could be F# or Forth. If the automatic detection +doesn't work for you, or you don't edit F# at all, use this in your +startup vimrc: > + :let filetype_fs = "forth" + + +FORTRAN *fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax* + +Default highlighting and dialect ~ +Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default. This choice +should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is +almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77). + +Fortran source code form ~ +Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the +syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set. + +When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source +form. If you always use free source form, then > + :let fortran_free_source=1 +in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed +source form, then > + :let fortran_fixed_source=1 +in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. + +If the form of the source code depends, in a non-standard way, upon the file +extension, then it is most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin +file. For more information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. Note that this +will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax +on" command in your .vimrc file. + +When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free +source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes +fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If +neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to +determine which source form has been used by examining the file extension +using conventions common to the ifort, gfortran, Cray, NAG, and PathScale +compilers (.f, .for, .f77 for fixed-source, .f90, .f95, .f03, .f08 for +free-source). If none of this works, then the script examines the first five +columns of the first 500 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form +are detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The +algorithm should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a +file that begins with 500 or more full-line comments, the script may +incorrectly decide that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens, +just add a non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns +of the first twenty-five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file. + +Tabs in fortran files ~ +Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in +fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries. +Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like +using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the +variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as > + :let fortran_have_tabs=1 +placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will +mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins. + +Syntax folding of fortran files ~ +If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable +fortran_fold with a command such as > + :let fortran_fold=1 +to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that +is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function +subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you +also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as > + :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1 +then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select +case constructs. If you also set the variable +fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as > + :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1 +then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment +lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files. + +If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or +fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if +you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program +units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program +unit. + +More precise fortran syntax ~ +If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as > + :let fortran_more_precise=1 +then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular, +statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be +recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall +construct. + +Non-default fortran dialects ~ +The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably +find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory. A few legacy constructs +deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo +items. + +If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that +other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and +that free source form will be assumed. + +The dialect can be selected in various ways. If all your fortran files use +the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior +to your syntax on statement. The case-sensitive, permissible values of +fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are +ignored. + +If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to +set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file. For more information on +ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your fortran files with +an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should +contain the code > + let s:extfname = expand("%:e") + if s:extfname ==? "f90" + let b:fortran_dialect="F" + else + unlet! b:fortran_dialect + endif +Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command +precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file. + +Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify +the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis, +by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or +f08) in one of the first three lines in your file. For example, your older .f +files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would +identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a +Fortran comment of the form > + ! fortran_dialect=F + +For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the +now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be +silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F" +instead. + +The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to +comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some +non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted +or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo +items. + +Limitations ~ +Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith +strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly +because Fortran90 has no reserved words. + +For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and +|ft-fortran-plugin|. + +FREEBASIC *freebasic.vim* *ft-freebasic-syntax* + +FreeBASIC files will be highlighted differently for each of the four available +dialects, "fb", "qb", "fblite" and "deprecated". See |ft-freebasic-plugin| +for how to select the correct dialect. + +Highlighting is further configurable via the following variables. + +Variable Highlight ~ +*freebasic_no_comment_fold* disable multiline comment folding +*freebasic_operators* non-alpha operators +*freebasic_space_errors* trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab> +*freebasic_type_suffixes* QuickBASIC style type suffixes + + + +FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES *fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax* + +In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match +the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns +appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these +patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version +number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm. + +For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/ +as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: > + + :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 | + \ set filetype=fvwm + +GSP *gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax* + +The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by |html.vim|, and +the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks) +is defined by |java.vim|. The following HTML groups defined in |html.vim| +are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code: + + htmlString + htmlValue + htmlEndTag + htmlTag + htmlTagN + +Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline +java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML +group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight +correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava +to the contains clause. + +The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError +group to make them easier to see. + + +GROFF *groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax* + +The groff syntax file is a wrapper for |nroff.vim|, see the notes +under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose +of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the +filetype from a |modeline| or in a personal filetype definitions file +(see |filetype.txt|). + + +HASKELL *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax* + +The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate +Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell +syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives. + +If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a +light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: > + :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1 +To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers, +add: > + :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1 +To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: > + :let hs_highlight_types = 1 +And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: > + :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1 +If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in +your .vimrc: > + :let hs_highlight_debug = 1 + +The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor +directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid +directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for +operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those +as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: > + :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1 + +The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to +automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains +TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs +or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting +in your .vimrc > + :let lhs_markup = none +for no highlighting at all, or > + :let lhs_markup = tex +to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup. +For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of +this variable, so e.g. > + :let b:lhs_markup = tex +will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be +set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or +loading a file. + + +HTML *html.vim* *ft-html-syntax* + +The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows. + +The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag. +This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for +closing tags the 'Identifier' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those +are defined for you) + +Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag +names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which +makes it easy to spot errors + +Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute +names are colored differently than unknown ones. + +Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags +are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal +text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>, +while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but +only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in +<A href="somefile.html">). + +If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the +following syntax groups: + + - htmlBold + - htmlBoldUnderline + - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic + - htmlUnderline + - htmlUnderlineItalic + - htmlItalic + - htmlTitle for titles + - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings + +To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception +of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the +following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files +are read during initialization) > + :let html_my_rendering=1 + +If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at +http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html + +You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your +vimrc file: > + :let html_no_rendering=1 + +HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the +details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors. +However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and +ends with -->) you can define > + :let html_wrong_comments=1 + +JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as +'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard +programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are +currently supported, no other scripting language has been added yet. + +Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too. + +There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been +written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the +following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language +(the example comes from the asp.vim file): +> + runtime! syntax/html.vim + syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp + +Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain +the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc. + + *html-folding* +The HTML syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between start +and end tags. This can be turned on by > + + :let g:html_syntax_folding = 1 + :set foldmethod=syntax + +Note: Syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly, +especially for large files. + + +HTML/OS (by Aestiva) *htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax* + +The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows: + +Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM +doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change +this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a +different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: > + :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray + +Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose. + +Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to +signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening +a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: > + :set syntax=htmlos + +Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a +block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively. + + +IA64 *ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax* + +Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See |asm.vim| for +how to recognize this filetype. + +To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: > + :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64" + + +INFORM *inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax* + +Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as +most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols +to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: > + :let inform_highlight_simple=1 + +By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted, +and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If +you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you +need to add this to your startup sequence: > + :let inform_highlight_glulx=1 + +This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the +set of highlighted system functions. + +The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when +it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors +by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your +startup sequence: > + :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1 + +By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler +version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older +Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your +startup sequence: > + :let inform_highlight_old=1 + +IDL *idl.vim* *idl-syntax* + +IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In +Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls. + +IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to +rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat +repetitive but seems to work. + +There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them +are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions. + +The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions. + +Variable Effect ~ + +idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific + extensions +idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions +idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but + quite helpful) +idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors + + +JAVA *java.vim* *ft-java-syntax* + +The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options: + +In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was +flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous +classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the +old way, put the following line into your vim startup file: > + :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1 + +All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To +highlight them use: > + :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1 + +You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you +download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html. +If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io +use the following: > + :let java_highlight_java_io=1 +Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported. + +Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on +how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight +functions: + +If you write function declarations that are always indented by either +a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set > + :let java_highlight_functions="indent" +However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are +supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use > + :let java_highlight_functions="style" +If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function +declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the +definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the +original one and then adds the code to highlight functions. + +In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should +only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging +statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in +your startup file: > + :let java_highlight_debug=1 +The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special' +characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define +new highlightings for the following groups.: + Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType +which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug +strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I +have opted to choose another background for those statements. + +Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and +creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code +similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|). You can even add Javascript +and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however: + 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by + some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change + the color change the group CommentTitle). + 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'. + 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special' + 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials + and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function. +To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: > + :let java_ignore_javadoc=1 + +If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you +can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic +scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you +actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded +CSS. The options to use are > + :let java_javascript=1 + :let java_css=1 + :let java_vb=1 + +In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors +for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with > + :hi link javaParen Comment +or > + :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff + +If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed +when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable +to a larger number: > + :let java_minlines = 50 +This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first +displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger +number is that redrawing can become slow. + + +JSON *json.vim* *ft-json-syntax* + +The json syntax file provides syntax highlighting with conceal support by +default. To disable concealment: > + let g:vim_json_conceal = 0 + +To disable syntax highlighting of errors: > + let g:vim_json_warnings = 0 + + +LACE *lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax* + +Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the +style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just +define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: > + :let lace_case_insensitive=1 + + +LEX *lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax* + +Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter +gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for > + :syn sync minlines=300 +may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization +difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files). + + +LIFELINES *lifelines.vim* *ft-lifelines-syntax* + +To highlight deprecated functions as errors, add in your .vimrc: > + + :let g:lifelines_deprecated = 1 +< + +LISP *lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax* + +The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: > + + g:lisp_instring : If it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted + as if the contents of the string were lisp. + Useful for AutoLisp. + g:lisp_rainbow : If it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels + of parenthesization will receive different + highlighting. +< +The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for +the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of +colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode +specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the +usual color scheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual +highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see |'bg'|). + + +LITE *lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax* + +There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting. + +If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > + + :let lite_sql_query = 1 + +For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can +set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > + + :let lite_minlines = 200 + + +LPC *lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax* + +LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensjö C. The +file name of LPC is usually *.c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother +users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you +should set a variable in your .vimrc file: > + + :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1 + +If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a +modeline. For a LPC file: + + // vim:set ft=lpc: + +For a C file that is recognized as LPC: + + // vim:set ft=c: + +If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file. + +There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely +used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22 +and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also +assert the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when +you are using the latest version of MudOS: > + + :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1 + +For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: > + + :let lpc_compat_32 = 1 + +For LPC4 series of LPC: > + + :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1 + +For uLPC series of LPC: +uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax +instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike + + +LUA *lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax* + +The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is +the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables +lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua +5.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this: + + :let lua_version = 5 + :let lua_subversion = 1 + + +MAIL *mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim* + +Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures, +quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions, +signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by +whitespaces and end with a newline. + +Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>' +as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text +only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space). + +By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first +displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails +with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: > + + :let mail_minlines = 30 + + +MAKE *make.vim* *ft-make-syntax* + +In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot +errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this +feature off by using: > + + :let make_no_commands = 1 + + +MAPLE *maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax* + +Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language +supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user. +The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be +highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: > + + :let mvpkg_all= 1 + +to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by +choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to +1, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing +$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim). + + Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors > + mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process + mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex + mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats + mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student + mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools + mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor + mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder + mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries + + +MARKDOWN *ft-markdown-syntax* + +If you have long regions there might be wrong highlighting. At the cost of +slowing down displaying, you can have the engine look further back to sync on +the start of a region, for example 500 lines: > + + :let g:markdown_minlines = 500 + + +MATHEMATICA *mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax* + +Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you +have the following in your .vimrc: > + + let filetype_m = "mma" + + +MOO *moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax* + +If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your +highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style +comments: > + + :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1 + +To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: > + + :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1 + +To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching +'%(' and '%)' inside strings: > + + :let moo_no_regexp = 1 + +Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: > + + :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1 + +To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): > + + :let moo_builtin_properties = 1 + +Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you +use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group. +To enable this option: > + + :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1 + +An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: > + + :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained + + +MSQL *msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax* + +There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting. + +If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > + + :let msql_sql_query = 1 + +For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can +set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > + + :let msql_minlines = 200 + + +N1QL *n1ql.vim* *ft-n1ql-syntax* + +N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in +Couchbase Server databases. + +Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments, +and special values. Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its +many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL. + + +NCF *ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax* + +There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting. + +If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as +errors, use this: > + + :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1 + +If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset. + + +NROFF *nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax* + +The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to +activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you +can use them. + +For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text +processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting +features for groff, arrange for files to be recognized as groff (see +|ft-groff-syntax|) or add the following option to your start-up files: > + + :let nroff_is_groff = 1 + +Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in +Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and +there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff +you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you +can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's +native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly: +\[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm +accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim +environments. + +In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should +follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation. + +1. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines. + +2. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period, + exclamation mark, etc. + +3. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a + carriage return. + +The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking +algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above. + +Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and, +furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and +vertical space input will be output as is. + +Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences +than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common +practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation +marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you +need to maintain regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing +spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: > + + :let nroff_space_errors = 1 + +Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere +with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching +highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and +"nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: > + + hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse + hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold + \ gui=reverse,bold + +If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as +with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc +file: > + + let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1 + +As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended +paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package. + +Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling +groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default. + + +OCAML *ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax* + +The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml, +.mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable > + + :let ocaml_revised = 1 + +you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported +by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable > + + :let ocaml_noend_error = 1 + +prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources +contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore. + + +PAPP *papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax* + +The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extent, .pxml +and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml +as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml +sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If +you set the variable: > + + :let papp_include_html=1 + +in your startup file it will try to syntax-highlight html code inside phtml +sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to +edit sensibly. ;) + +The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at +http://papp.plan9.de. + + +PASCAL *pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax* + +Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal and those matching "*.pp" +could be Puppet or Pascal. If the automatic detection doesn't work for you, +or you only edit Pascal files, use this in your startup vimrc: > + + :let filetype_p = "pascal" + :let filetype_pp = "pascal" + +The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions +provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler. +Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are +enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the +following line to your startup file: > + + :let pascal_traditional=1 + +To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments, +keywords, etc): > + + :let pascal_delphi=1 + + +The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +, +*, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol +operators, add the following line to your startup file: > + + :let pascal_symbol_operator=1 + +Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: > + + :let pascal_no_functions=1 + +Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers. Besides +pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to +match Turbo Pascal. > + + :let pascal_gpc=1 + +or > + + :let pascal_fpc=1 + +To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the +pascal_one_line_string variable. > + + :let pascal_one_line_string=1 + +If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs +will be highlighted as Error. > + + :let pascal_no_tabs=1 + + + +PERL *perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax* + +There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting. + +Inline POD highlighting is now turned on by default. If you don't wish +to have the added complexity of highlighting POD embedded within Perl +files, you may set the 'perl_include_pod' option to 0: > + + :let perl_include_pod = 0 + +To reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch +off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. > + +To handle package references in variable and function names not differently +from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): > + + :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1 + +(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables" +enabled it.) + +If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: > + + :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1 + +(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.) + +The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will +be highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable +perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line. + + "hello world!"; qq|hello world|; + ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement) + S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement) + +(^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all) + +The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of +synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly. +If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely +then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can +figure out the line that causes the mistake. + +One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. > + + :let perl_no_sync_on_sub + :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var + +Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for +its attempts in syntax highlighting. > + + :let perl_sync_dist = 100 + +If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: > + + :let perl_fold = 1 + +If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: > + + :let perl_fold_blocks = 1 + +Subroutines are folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. If you do not want +this, you can set 'perl_nofold_subs': > + + :let perl_nofold_subs = 1 + +Anonymous subroutines are not folded by default; you may enable their folding +via 'perl_fold_anonymous_subs': > + + :let perl_fold_anonymous_subs = 1 + +Packages are also folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. To disable this +behavior, set 'perl_nofold_packages': > + + :let perl_nofold_packages = 1 + +PHP3 and PHP4 *php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax* + +[Note: Previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4 +it has been renamed to "php"] + +There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting. + +If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: > + + let php_sql_query = 1 + +For highlighting the Baselib methods: > + + let php_baselib = 1 + +Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: > + + let php_htmlInStrings = 1 + +Using the old colorstyle: > + + let php_oldStyle = 1 + +Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: > + + let php_asp_tags = 1 + +Disable short tags: > + + let php_noShortTags = 1 + +For highlighting parent error ] or ): > + + let php_parent_error_close = 1 + +For skipping a php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing +one: > + + let php_parent_error_open = 1 + +Enable folding for classes and functions: > + + let php_folding = 1 + +Selecting syncing method: > + + let php_sync_method = x + +x = -1 to sync by search (default), +x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards, +x = 0 to sync from start. + + +PLAINTEX *plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax* + +TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain" +variant of TeX. If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX, +see |ft-tex-plugin|. + +This syntax file has the option > + + let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1 + +if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}". + + +PPWIZARD *ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax* + +PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files + +This syntax file has the options: + +- ppwiz_highlight_defs : Determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's + definitions. Possible values are + + ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the + colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables). + + ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : Preprocessor #define and #evaluate + statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line + continuation symbols. + + The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1. + +- ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal + HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text. + + +PHTML *phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax* + +There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting. + +If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > + + :let phtml_sql_query = 1 + +For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can +set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > + + :let phtml_minlines = 200 + + +POSTSCRIPT *postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax* + +There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript. + +First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are +currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original +and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2. +Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of +extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest +level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want +highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: > + + :let postscr_level=2 + +If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is +the most prevalent version currently. + +Note: Not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a +particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of +PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript! + +If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of +Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as +follows: > + + :let postscr_display=1 + +If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of +Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable +postscr_ghostscript as follows: > + + :let postscr_ghostscript=1 + +PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it +useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can +cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and +character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working +explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be +highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: > + + :let postscr_fonts=1 + :let postscr_encodings=1 + +There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In +PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their +operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators, +if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical +operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way +or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be +highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable +postscr_andornot_binary as follows: > + + :let postscr_andornot_binary=1 +< + + *ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax* +PRINTCAP + TERMCAP *ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax* + +This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases. + +In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match +the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns +appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file. For these +patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or +"term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap. + +For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap +files, add the following: > + + :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" | + \ set filetype=ptcap + +If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which +are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines" +internal variable to a larger number: > + + :let ptcap_minlines = 50 + +(The default is 20 lines.) + + +PROGRESS *progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax* + +Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection +doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your +startup vimrc: > + :let filetype_w = "progress" +The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be +Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: > + :let filetype_i = "progress" + :let filetype_p = "progress" + + +PYTHON *python.vim* *ft-python-syntax* + +There are six options to control Python syntax highlighting. + +For highlighted numbers: > + :let python_no_number_highlight = 1 + +For highlighted builtin functions: > + :let python_no_builtin_highlight = 1 + +For highlighted standard exceptions: > + :let python_no_exception_highlight = 1 + +For highlighted doctests and code inside: > + :let python_no_doctest_highlight = 1 +or > + :let python_no_doctest_code_highlight = 1 +The first option implies the second one. + +For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: > + :let python_space_error_highlight = 1 + +If you want all possible Python highlighting: + :let python_highlight_all = 1 +This has the same effect as setting python_space_error_highlight and +unsetting all the other ones. + +If you use Python 2 or straddling code (Python 2 and 3 compatible), +you can enforce the use of an older syntax file with support for +Python 2 and up to Python 3.5. > + :let python_use_python2_syntax = 1 +This option will exclude all modern Python 3.6 or higher features. + +Note: Only existence of these options matters, not their value. + You can replace 1 above with anything. + + +QUAKE *quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax* + +The Quake syntax definition should work for most FPS (First Person Shooter) +based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary a bit +between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the syntax +definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow users +to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables can +be set for the following effects: + +set to highlight commands only available in Quake: > + :let quake_is_quake1 = 1 + +set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: > + :let quake_is_quake2 = 1 + +set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: > + :let quake_is_quake3 = 1 + +Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more +commands than are actually available to you by the game. + + +R *r.vim* *ft-r-syntax* + +The parsing of R code for syntax highlight starts 40 lines backwards, but you +can set a different value in your |vimrc|. Example: > + let r_syntax_minlines = 60 + +You can also turn off syntax highlighting of ROxygen: > + let r_syntax_hl_roxygen = 0 + +enable folding of code delimited by parentheses, square brackets and curly +braces: > + let r_syntax_folding = 1 + +and highlight as functions all keywords followed by an opening parenthesis: > + let r_syntax_fun_pattern = 1 + + +R MARKDOWN *rmd.vim* *ft-rmd-syntax* + +To disable syntax highlight of YAML header, add to your |vimrc|: > + let rmd_syn_hl_yaml = 0 + +To disable syntax highlighting of citation keys: > + let rmd_syn_hl_citations = 0 + +To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers: > + let rmd_syn_hl_chunk = 1 + +By default, chunks of R code will be highlighted following the rules of R +language. If you want proper syntax highlighting of chunks of other languages, +you should add them to either `markdown_fenced_languages` or +`rmd_fenced_languages`. For example to properly highlight both R and Python, +you may add this to your |vimrc|: > + let rmd_fenced_languages = ['r', 'python'] + + +R RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rrst.vim* *ft-rrst-syntax* + +To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers, add to your |vimrc|: > + let rrst_syn_hl_chunk = 1 + + +READLINE *readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax* + +The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a +few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these +items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the +command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: > + let readline_has_bash = 1 + +This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and +later, and part earlier) adds. + + +REGO *rego.vim* *ft-rego-syntax* + +Rego is a query language developed by Styra. It is mostly used as a policy +language for kubernetes, but can be applied to almost anything. Files with +the following extensions are recognized as rego files: .rego. + + +RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rst.vim* *ft-rst-syntax* + +Syntax highlighting is enabled for code blocks within the document for a +select number of file types. See $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/rst.vim for the default +syntax list. + +To set a user-defined list of code block syntax highlighting: > + let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...] + +To assign multiple code block types to a single syntax, define +`rst_syntax_code_list` as a mapping: > + let rst_syntax_code_list = { + \ 'cpp': ['cpp', 'c++'], + \ 'bash': ['bash', 'sh'], + ... + \ } + +To use color highlighting for emphasis text: > + let rst_use_emphasis_colors = 1 + +To enable folding of sections: > + let rst_fold_enabled = 1 + +Note that folding can cause performance issues on some platforms. + + +REXX *rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax* + +If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed +when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable +to a larger number: > + :let rexx_minlines = 50 +This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first +displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger +number is that redrawing can become slow. + +Vim tries to guess what type a ".r" file is. If it can't be detected (from +comment lines), the default is "r". To make the default rexx add this line to +your .vimrc: *g:filetype_r* +> + :let g:filetype_r = "r" + + +RUBY *ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax* + + Ruby: Operator highlighting |ruby_operators| + Ruby: Whitespace errors |ruby_space_errors| + Ruby: Folding |ruby_fold| |ruby_foldable_groups| + Ruby: Reducing expensive operations |ruby_no_expensive| |ruby_minlines| + Ruby: Spellchecking strings |ruby_spellcheck_strings| + + *ruby_operators* + Ruby: Operator highlighting ~ + +Operators can be highlighted by defining "ruby_operators": > + + :let ruby_operators = 1 +< + *ruby_space_errors* + Ruby: Whitespace errors ~ + +Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": > + + :let ruby_space_errors = 1 +< +This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character +as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and +"ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after +spaces respectively. + + *ruby_fold* *ruby_foldable_groups* + Ruby: Folding ~ + +Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": > + + :let ruby_fold = 1 +< +This will set the value of 'foldmethod' to "syntax" locally to the current +buffer or window, which will enable syntax-based folding when editing Ruby +filetypes. + +Default folding is rather detailed, i.e., small syntax units like "if", "do", +"%w[]" may create corresponding fold levels. + +You can set "ruby_foldable_groups" to restrict which groups are foldable: > + + :let ruby_foldable_groups = 'if case %' +< +The value is a space-separated list of keywords: + + keyword meaning ~ + -------- ------------------------------------- ~ + ALL Most block syntax (default) + NONE Nothing + if "if" or "unless" block + def "def" block + class "class" block + module "module" block + do "do" block + begin "begin" block + case "case" block + for "for", "while", "until" loops + { Curly bracket block or hash literal + [ Array literal + % Literal with "%" notation, e.g.: %w(STRING), %!STRING! + / Regexp + string String and shell command output (surrounded by ', ", `) + : Symbol + # Multiline comment + << Here documents + __END__ Source code after "__END__" directive + + *ruby_no_expensive* + Ruby: Reducing expensive operations ~ + +By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement +of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you +experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support) +you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: > + + :let ruby_no_expensive = 1 +< +In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords. + + *ruby_minlines* + +If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while +scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting +the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: > + + :let ruby_minlines = 100 +< +Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your +largest class or module. + + *ruby_spellcheck_strings* + Ruby: Spellchecking strings ~ + +Ruby syntax will perform spellchecking of strings if you define +"ruby_spellcheck_strings": > + + :let ruby_spellcheck_strings = 1 +< + +SCHEME *scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax* + +By default only R7RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented. + +scheme.vim also supports extensions of the CHICKEN Scheme->C compiler. +Define b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them. + + +SDL *sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax* + +The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many +of them it's almost impossibly to cope. + +The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are +case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be +used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the +highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: > + :let sdl_2000=1 + +This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old +keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: > + :let SDL_no_96=1 + + +The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very +satisfied with it for my own projects. + + +SED *sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax* + +To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo +highlighting on the tabs), define "g:sed_highlight_tabs" by putting > + + :let g:sed_highlight_tabs = 1 +< +in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs +inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included +by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is +also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that, +you can easily count the number of tabs in a string. + +GNU sed allows comments after text on the same line. BSD sed only allows +comments where "#" is the first character of the line. To enforce BSD-style +comments, i.e. mark end-of-line comments as errors, use: > + + :let g:sed_dialect = "bsd" +< +Note that there are other differences between GNU sed and BSD sed which are +not (yet) affected by this setting. + +Bugs: + + The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute + command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned, + transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong. + (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the + involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for + each plausible pattern delimiter). + + +SGML *sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax* + +The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows. + +The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag. +This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for +closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are +defined for you) + +Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag +names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors. + +Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute +names are colored differently than unknown ones. + +Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags +are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal +text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal> +<replaceable> <ulink> and <link>. + +If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the +following syntax groups: + + - sgmlBold + - sgmlBoldItalic + - sgmlUnderline + - sgmlItalic + - sgmlLink for links + +To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the +following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files +are read during initialization) > + let sgml_my_rendering=1 + +You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your +vimrc file: > + let sgml_no_rendering=1 + +(Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>) + + + *ft-posix-syntax* *ft-dash-syntax* +SH *sh.vim* *ft-sh-syntax* *ft-bash-syntax* *ft-ksh-syntax* + +This covers syntax highlighting for the older Unix (Bourne) sh, and newer +shells such as bash, dash, posix, and the Korn shells. + +Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that +various filenames are of specific types, e.g.: > + + ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh + bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash +< +See $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim for the full list of patterns. If none of these +cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined (ex. looking for +/bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, then +that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to be +shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems sh is +symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix). + +One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following +variables in your <.vimrc>: + + ksh: > + let g:is_kornshell = 1 +< posix: (using this is nearly the same as setting g:is_kornshell to 1) > + let g:is_posix = 1 +< bash: > + let g:is_bash = 1 +< sh: (default) Bourne shell > + let g:is_sh = 1 + +< (dash users should use posix) + +If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a +default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume +the Bourne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration +statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the +sh your system uses and install the associated "let..." in your <.vimrc>. + +The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: > + + let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0 (default, no syntax folding) + let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 (enable function folding) + let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2 (enable heredoc folding) + let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4 (enable if/do/for folding) +> +then various syntax items (ie. HereDocuments and function bodies) become +syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|). You also may add these together +to get multiple types of folding: > + + let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3 (enables function and heredoc folding) + +If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed +when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable +to a larger number. Example: > + + let sh_minlines = 500 + +This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first +displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger +number is that redrawing can become slow. + +If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To +reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: > + + let sh_maxlines = 100 +< +The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to +speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear. + +syntax/sh.vim tries to flag certain problems as errors; usually things like +unmatched "]", "done", "fi", etc. If you find the error handling problematic +for your purposes, you may suppress such error highlighting by putting +the following line in your .vimrc: > + + let g:sh_no_error= 1 +< + + *sh-embed* *sh-awk* + Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~ + +You may wish to embed languages into sh. I'll give an example courtesy of +Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following +file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: > + + " AWK Embedding: + " ============== + " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope. + if exists("b:current_syntax") + unlet b:current_syntax + endif + syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim + syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained + syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode + syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded + hi def link AWKCommand Type +< +This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: > + awk '...awk code here...' +be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax. Clearly this may be +extended to other languages. + + +SPEEDUP *spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax* +(AspenTech plant simulator) + +The Speedup syntax file has some options: + +- strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for + sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not + other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section). + +- highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types + like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a + plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in + the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include + them in the syntax file. + +- oneline_comments : This value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the + highlighting of # style comments. + + oneline_comments = 1 : Allow normal Speedup code after an even + number of #s. + + oneline_comments = 2 : Show code starting with the second # as + error. This is the default setting. + + oneline_comments = 3 : Show the whole line as error if it contains + more than one #. + +Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to +PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is +fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of +the syntax file. + + +SQL *sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax* + *sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax* + *sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax* + +While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own +custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of +SQL. Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default. + +Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax +scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL +supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a +buffer by buffer basis. + +For more detailed instructions see |ft_sql.txt|. + + +SQUIRREL *squirrel.vim* *ft-squirrel-syntax* + +Squirrel is a high level imperative, object-oriented programming language, +designed to be a light-weight scripting language that fits in the size, memory +bandwidth, and real-time requirements of applications like video games. Files +with the following extensions are recognized as squirrel files: .nut. + + +TCSH *tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax* + +This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See |csh.vim| +for how the filetype is detected. + +Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable +is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist +add this line to your .vimrc: > + + :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0 + +If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed +when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable +to a larger number: > + + :let tcsh_minlines = 1000 + +This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first +displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then +synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for +tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that +redrawing can become slow. + + +TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* *latex-syntax* + *syntax-tex* *syntax-latex* + + Tex Contents~ + Tex: Want Syntax Folding? |tex-folding| + Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted |g:tex_nospell| + Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? |tex-nospell| + Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones? |tex-verb| + Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones |tex-runon| + Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? |tex-slow| + Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? |tex-morecommands| + Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? |tex-error| + Tex: Need a new Math Group? |tex-math| + Tex: Starting a New Style? |tex-style| + Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode |tex-conceal| + Tex: Selective Conceal Mode |g:tex_conceal| + Tex: Controlling iskeyword |g:tex_isk| + Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control |tex-supersub| + Tex: Match Check Control |tex-matchcheck| + + *tex-folding* *g:tex_fold_enabled* + Tex: Want Syntax Folding? ~ + +As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters, +sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put > + let g:tex_fold_enabled=1 +in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a +modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: > + % vim: fdm=syntax +If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into > + https://vimhelp.org/vim_faq.txt.html#faq-29.7 +< + *g:tex_nospell* + Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted~ + +If you don't want spell checking anywhere in your LaTeX document, put > + let g:tex_nospell=1 +into your .vimrc. If you merely wish to suppress spell checking inside +comments only, see |g:tex_comment_nospell|. + + *tex-nospell* *g:tex_comment_nospell* + Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~ + +Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would +prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files. To do +this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: > + let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1 +If you want to suppress spell checking everywhere inside your LaTeX document, +see |g:tex_nospell|. + + *tex-verb* *g:tex_verbspell* + Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~ + +Often verbatim regions are used for things like source code; seldom does +one want source code spell-checked. However, for those of you who do +want your verbatim zones spell-checked, put the following in your <.vimrc>: > + let g:tex_verbspell= 1 +< + *tex-runon* *tex-stopzone* + Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones ~ + +The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The +highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and +texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones +terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized +as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a +special "TeX comment" has been provided > + %stopzone +which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a +texMathZone. + + *tex-slow* *tex-sync* + Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~ + +If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for > + :syn sync maxlines=200 + :syn sync minlines=50 +(especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to +increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group, +if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?). + +Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see +|tex-folding| for a way around this. + + *g:tex_fast* + +Finally, if syntax highlighting is still too slow, you may set > + + :let g:tex_fast= "" + +in your .vimrc. Used this way, the g:tex_fast variable causes the syntax +highlighting script to avoid defining any regions and associated +synchronization. The result will be much faster syntax highlighting; the +price: you will no longer have as much highlighting or any syntax-based +folding, and you will be missing syntax-based error checking. + +You may decide that some syntax is acceptable; you may use the following table +selectively to enable just some syntax highlighting: > + + b : allow bold and italic syntax + c : allow texComment syntax + m : allow texMatcher syntax (ie. {...} and [...]) + M : allow texMath syntax + p : allow parts, chapter, section, etc syntax + r : allow texRefZone syntax (nocite, bibliography, label, pageref, eqref) + s : allow superscript/subscript regions + S : allow texStyle syntax + v : allow verbatim syntax + V : allow texNewEnv and texNewCmd syntax +< +As an example, let g:tex_fast= "M" will allow math-associated highlighting +but suppress all the other region-based syntax highlighting. +(also see: |g:tex_conceal| and |tex-supersub|) + + *tex-morecommands* *tex-package* + Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~ + +LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full +of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a +package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support +it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the +techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided +by syntax/tex.vim. Please consider uploading any extensions that you write, +which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to +http://vim.sf.net/. + +I've included some support for various popular packages on my website: > + + http://www.drchip.org/astronaut/vim/index.html#LATEXPKGS +< +The syntax files there go into your .../after/syntax/tex/ directory. + + *tex-error* *g:tex_no_error* + Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~ + +The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus, +although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate +errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you, +you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: > + let g:tex_no_error=1 +and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed. + + *tex-math* + Tex: Need a new Math Group? ~ + +If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following +code shows you an example as to how you might do so: > + call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform) +You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix +(currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself). +As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: > + call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1) +You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group, +and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim. +The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group +has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*). + + *tex-style* *b:tex_stylish* + Tex: Starting a New Style? ~ + +One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in +commands available. However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the +following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag +such use of @ as an error. To solve this: > + + :let b:tex_stylish = 1 + :set ft=tex + +Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim> +always accept such use of @. + + *tex-cchar* *tex-cole* *tex-conceal* + Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode~ + +If you have |'conceallevel'| set to 2 and if your encoding is utf-8, then a +number of character sequences can be translated into appropriate utf-8 glyphs, +including various accented characters, Greek characters in MathZones, and +superscripts and subscripts in MathZones. Not all characters can be made into +superscripts or subscripts; the constraint is due to what utf-8 supports. +In fact, only a few characters are supported as subscripts. + +One way to use this is to have vertically split windows (see |CTRL-W_v|); one +with |'conceallevel'| at 0 and the other at 2; and both using |'scrollbind'|. + + *g:tex_conceal* + Tex: Selective Conceal Mode~ + +You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your +<.vimrc>. By default, g:tex_conceal is set to "admgs" to enable concealment +for the following sets of characters: > + + a = accents/ligatures + b = bold and italic + d = delimiters + m = math symbols + g = Greek + s = superscripts/subscripts +< +By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character +substitution will not be made. + + *g:tex_isk* *g:tex_stylish* + Tex: Controlling iskeyword~ + +Normally, LaTeX keywords support 0-9, a-z, A-z, and 192-255 only. Latex +keywords don't support the underscore - except when in *.sty files. The +syntax highlighting script handles this with the following logic: + + * If g:tex_stylish exists and is 1 + then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_" + will be allowed as part of keywords + (regardless of g:tex_isk) + * Else if the file's suffix is sty, cls, clo, dtx, or ltx, + then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_" + will be allowed as part of keywords + (regardless of g:tex_isk) + + * If g:tex_isk exists, then it will be used for the local 'iskeyword' + * Else the local 'iskeyword' will be set to 48-57,a-z,A-Z,192-255 + + *tex-supersub* *g:tex_superscripts* *g:tex_subscripts* + Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control~ + + See |tex-conceal| for how to enable concealed character replacement. + + See |g:tex_conceal| for selectively concealing accents, bold/italic, + math, Greek, and superscripts/subscripts. + + One may exert fine control over which superscripts and subscripts one + wants syntax-based concealment for (see |:syn-cchar|). Since not all + fonts support all characters, one may override the + concealed-replacement lists; by default these lists are given by: > + + let g:tex_superscripts= "[0-9a-zA-W.,:;+-<>/()=]" + let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aehijklmnoprstuvx,+-/().]" +< + For example, I use Luxi Mono Bold; it doesn't support subscript + characters for "hklmnpst", so I put > + let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aeijoruvx,+-/().]" +< in ~/.vim/ftplugin/tex/tex.vim in order to avoid having inscrutable + utf-8 glyphs appear. + + *tex-matchcheck* *g:tex_matchcheck* + Tex: Match Check Control~ + + Sometimes one actually wants mismatched parentheses, square braces, + and or curly braces; for example, \text{(1,10]} is a range from but + not including 1 to and including 10. This wish, of course, conflicts + with the desire to provide delimiter mismatch detection. To + accommodate these conflicting goals, syntax/tex.vim provides > + g:tex_matchcheck = '[({[]' +< which is shown along with its default setting. So, if one doesn't + want [] and () to be checked for mismatches, try using > + let g:tex_matchcheck= '[{}]' +< If you don't want matching to occur inside bold and italicized + regions, > + let g:tex_excludematcher= 1 +< will prevent the texMatcher group from being included in those regions. + +TF *tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax* + +There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting. + +For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can +set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > + + :let tf_minlines = your choice +< +VIM *vim.vim* *ft-vim-syntax* + *g:vimsyn_minlines* *g:vimsyn_maxlines* +There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen +updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the +g:vimsyn_minlines variable. The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to +improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). > + + g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines + g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines +< + (g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of + these two options) + + *g:vimsyn_embed* +The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of +embedded script highlighting they wish to have. > + + g:vimsyn_embed == 0 : don't support any embedded scripts + g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'l' : support embedded lua + g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : support embedded mzscheme + g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : support embedded perl + g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : support embedded python + g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : support embedded ruby + g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : support embedded tcl +< +By default, g:vimsyn_embed is a string supporting interpreters that your vim +itself supports. Concatenate multiple characters to support multiple types +of embedded interpreters; ie. g:vimsyn_embed= "mp" supports embedded mzscheme +and embedded perl. + *g:vimsyn_folding* + +Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: > + + g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding + g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups + g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions + g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'l' : fold lua script + g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script + g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl script + g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python script + g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby script + g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl script +< + *g:vimsyn_noerror* +Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; Vim script +is a difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error +highlighting is to put the following line in your |vimrc|: > + + let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1 +< + + +WDL *wdl.vim* *wdl-syntax* + +The Workflow Description Language is a way to specify data processing workflows +with a human-readable and writeable syntax. This is used a lot in +bioinformatics. More info on the spec can be found here: +https://github.com/openwdl/wdl + + +XF86CONFIG *xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax* + +The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both +variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect. +You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable +xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in +your .vimrc. Example: > + :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3 +When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable. + +Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use +"SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name +highlighted. + + +XML *xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax* + +Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by +setting a global variable: > + + :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1 +< + *xml-folding* +The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between +start and end tags. This can be turned on by > + + :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1 + :set foldmethod=syntax + +Note: Syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly, +especially for large files. + + +X Pixmaps (XPM) *xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax* + +xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the +XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings, +you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm". + +To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it +somewhere else with "P". + +Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: > + :function! GetPixel() + : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1] + : echo c + : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r" .. c + : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r" .. c + :endfunction + :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR> + :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor +This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen. +It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you +must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it. + +It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: > + :set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-* + + +YAML *yaml.vim* *ft-yaml-syntax* + + *g:yaml_schema* *b:yaml_schema* +A YAML schema is a combination of a set of tags and a mechanism for resolving +non-specific tags. For user this means that YAML parser may, depending on +plain scalar contents, treat plain scalar (which can actually be only string +and nothing else) as a value of the other type: null, boolean, floating-point, +integer. `g:yaml_schema` option determines according to which schema values +will be highlighted specially. Supported schemas are + +Schema Description ~ +failsafe No additional highlighting. +json Supports JSON-style numbers, booleans and null. +core Supports more number, boolean and null styles. +pyyaml In addition to core schema supports highlighting timestamps, + but there are some differences in what is recognized as + numbers and many additional boolean values not present in core + schema. + +Default schema is `core`. + +Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the +only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only +difference defined in the syntax file. + + +ZSH *zsh.vim* *ft-zsh-syntax* + +The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: > + + :let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1 + +============================================================================== +6. Defining a syntax *:syn-define* *E410* + +Vim understands three types of syntax items: + +1. Keyword + It can only contain keyword characters, according to the characters + specified with |:syn-iskeyword| or the 'iskeyword' option. It cannot + contain other syntax items. It will only match with a complete word (there + are no keyword characters before or after the match). The keyword "if" + would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because "(" is not a + keyword character and "d" is. + +2. Match + This is a match with a single regexp pattern. + +3. Region + This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match + with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A + "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern. + +Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group +you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item +to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment, +and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a +"Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make +one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group. +This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting +each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting +for a lot of groups. + +Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight +group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used +for the syntax group with the same name. + +In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was +defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by +using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a +match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a +keyword with ignoring case. + + +PRIORITY *:syn-priority* + +When several syntax items may match, these rules are used: + +1. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item + defined last has priority. +2. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items. +3. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that + start in later positions. + + +DEFINING CASE *:syn-case* *E390* + +:sy[ntax] case [match | ignore] + This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with + matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using + "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all + items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected. + +:sy[ntax] case + Show either "syntax case match" or "syntax case ignore". + + +DEFINING FOLDLEVEL *:syn-foldlevel* + +:sy[ntax] foldlevel start +:sy[ntax] foldlevel minimum + This defines how the foldlevel of a line is computed when using + foldmethod=syntax (see |fold-syntax| and |:syn-fold|): + + start: Use level of item containing start of line. + minimum: Use lowest local-minimum level of items on line. + + The default is "start". Use "minimum" to search a line horizontally + for the lowest level contained on the line that is followed by a + higher level. This produces more natural folds when syntax items + may close and open horizontally within a line. + +:sy[ntax] foldlevel + Show the current foldlevel method, either "syntax foldlevel start" or + "syntax foldlevel minimum". + + {not meaningful when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature} + +SPELL CHECKING *:syn-spell* + +:sy[ntax] spell toplevel +:sy[ntax] spell notoplevel +:sy[ntax] spell default + This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not + in a syntax item: + + toplevel: Text is spell checked. + notoplevel: Text is not spell checked. + default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking. + + For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters + |spell-syntax|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then + spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel". + + To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set. + +:sy[ntax] spell + Show the current syntax spell checking method, either "syntax spell + toplevel", "syntax spell notoplevel" or "syntax spell default". + + +SYNTAX ISKEYWORD SETTING *:syn-iskeyword* + +:sy[ntax] iskeyword [clear | {option}] + This defines the keyword characters. It's like the 'iskeyword' option + for but only applies to syntax highlighting. + + clear: Syntax specific iskeyword setting is disabled and the + buffer-local 'iskeyword' setting is used. + {option} Set the syntax 'iskeyword' option to a new value. + + Example: > + :syntax iskeyword @,48-57,192-255,$,_ +< + This would set the syntax specific iskeyword option to include all + alphabetic characters, plus the numeric characters, all accented + characters and also includes the "_" and the "$". + + If no argument is given, the current value will be output. + + Setting this option influences what |/\k| matches in syntax patterns + and also determines where |:syn-keyword| will be checked for a new + match. + + It is recommended when writing syntax files, to use this command to + set the correct value for the specific syntax language and not change + the 'iskeyword' option. + +DEFINING KEYWORDS *:syn-keyword* + +:sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}] + + This defines a number of keywords. + + {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment". + [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below. + {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group. + + Example: > + :syntax keyword Type int long char +< + The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to + all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword. + These examples do exactly the same: > + :syntax keyword Type contained int long char + :syntax keyword Type int long contained char + :syntax keyword Type int long char contained +< *E789* *E890* + When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in + Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the + variations at once: > + :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext] +< + Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the + characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character + isn't, the keyword will never be recognized. + Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in + 'iskeyword'. + See |:syn-iskeyword| for defining syntax specific iskeyword settings. + + A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the + keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest + and a keyword can't contain anything else. + + Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even + one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match + instead. + + The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters. + + The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment + differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained + and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different + highlight group. Example: > + :syn keyword vimCommand tag + :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag +< When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand" + highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that + contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used. + + +DEFINING MATCHES *:syn-match* + +:sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}] + [excludenl] + [keepend] + {pattern} + [{options}] + + This defines one match. + + {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment". + [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below. + [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$" + extend a containing match or region. Must be + given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl| + keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a + match with the end pattern. See + |:syn-keepend|. + {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match. + See |:syn-pattern| below. + Note that the pattern may match more than one + line, which makes the match depend on where + Vim starts searching for the pattern. You + need to make sure syncing takes care of this. + + Example (match a character constant): > + :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1 +< + +DEFINING REGIONS *:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end* + *E398* *E399* +:sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}] + [matchgroup={group-name}] + [keepend] + [extend] + [excludenl] + start={start-pattern} .. + [skip={skip-pattern}] + end={end-pattern} .. + [{options}] + + This defines one region. It may span several lines. + + {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment". + [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below. + [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following + start or end pattern matches only. Not used + for the text in between the matched start and + end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using + a different group for the start or end match. + See |:syn-matchgroup|. + keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a + match with the end pattern. See + |:syn-keepend|. + extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region + is contained in. See |:syn-extend|. + excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$" + extend a containing match or item. Only + useful for end patterns. Must be given before + the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl| + start={start-pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of + the region. See |:syn-pattern| below. + skip={skip-pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside + the region where not to look for the end + pattern. See |:syn-pattern| below. + end={end-pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of + the region. See |:syn-pattern| below. + + Example: > + :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+ +< + The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order. + There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more + start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip + pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It + is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign + (although it mostly looks better without white space). + + When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these + is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start + patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for + the end patterns. + + The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern. + Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the + end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern. + + The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the + search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what + you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in + the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble. + + Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start + pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT + work: > + :syn region First start="(" end=":" + :syn region Second start="(" end=";" +< The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has + higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next + ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: > + :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:" + :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};" +< This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and + repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible). + + *:syn-keepend* + By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern. + This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with + "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}" + will then end the contained region, but not the outer region: + { starts outer "{}" region + { starts contained "{}" region + } ends contained "{}" region + } ends outer "{} region + If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching + of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item. + This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for + contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing + that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: > + :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+ + :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend +< The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line, + even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>. + + When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried + after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first + encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any + contained matches. + *:syn-extend* + The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument. + When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses + "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be + extended. + This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while + others don't. Example: > + + :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript + :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained + :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend + +< Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue + further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript + item does extend the htmlRef item. + + Another example: > + :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend +< This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be + changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to + highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it + includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested + region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in. + + *:syn-excludenl* + When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$' + to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is + contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with + "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue + that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default + behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it: + 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all + contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be + used when all contained items must not extend the containing item. + 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match + from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if + only some contained items must not extend the containing item. + "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to. + + *:syn-matchgroup* + "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern + differently than the body of the region. Example: > + :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+ +< This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in + between with the "String" group. + The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow, + until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not + using a matchgroup. + + In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the + contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid + that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When + using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern + match that is highlighted with "matchgroup". + + Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in + different colors: > + :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2 + :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained + :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained + :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red + :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue + :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen +< + *E849* +The maximum number of syntax groups is 19999. + +============================================================================== +7. :syntax arguments *:syn-arguments* + +The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments. +The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order +and may be mixed with patterns. + +Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments +can not be used for all commands: + *E395* + contains oneline fold display extend concealends~ +:syntax keyword - - - - - - +:syntax match yes - yes yes yes - +:syntax region yes yes yes yes yes yes + +These arguments can be used for all three commands: + conceal + cchar + contained + containedin + nextgroup + transparent + skipwhite + skipnl + skipempty + +conceal *conceal* *:syn-conceal* + +When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable. +Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the +'conceallevel' option. The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether +concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to +edit the line. +Another way to conceal text is with |matchadd()|. + +concealends *:syn-concealends* + +When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of +the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable. +Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the +'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately +in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup" + +cchar *:syn-cchar* + *E844* +The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item +when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal +argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal +character defined in the 'listchars' option is used. The character cannot be +a control character such as Tab. Example: > + :syntax match Entity "&" conceal cchar=& +See |hl-Conceal| for highlighting. + +contained *:syn-contained* + +When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at +the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of +another match. Example: > + :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained + :syntax match Comment "//.*" contains=Todo + + +display *:syn-display* + +If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the +detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting, +by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is +to be displayed. + +Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these +conditions: +- The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region + for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next + line. +- The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or + make it continue on the next line. +- The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example + for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display", + because it may make that preprocessor match shorter. +- The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise, + and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a + "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would + match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line. + +Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used: +- match with a number +- match with a label + + +transparent *:syn-transparent* + +If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted +itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This +is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used +only to skip over a part of the text. + +The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in, +unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To +avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which +highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": > + :syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim + :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained + :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE + :hi link myString String + :hi link myWord Comment +Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last +match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent" +argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But +it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left +out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow +"myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Comment. This +happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same +position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here. + +When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained +items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you +see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look +through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture: + + look from here + + | | | | | | + V V V V V V + + xxxx yyy more contained items + .................... contained item (transparent) + ============================= first item + +The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a +transparent group. + +What you see is: + + =======xxxx=======yyy======== + +Thus you look through the transparent "....". + + +oneline *:syn-oneline* + +The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line +boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the +region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on +the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line +continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first +line, otherwise the region doesn't even start. + +When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end +pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The +end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument +means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must +be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a +line break. + + +fold *:syn-fold* + +The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item. +Example: > + :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold + :syn sync fromstart + :set foldmethod=syntax +This will make each {} block form one fold. + +The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item +ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold. +The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds. +See |:syn-foldlevel| to control how the foldlevel of a line is computed +from its syntax items. +{not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature} + + + *:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409* +contains={group-name},.. + +The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These +groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the +containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and +regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in +this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used +here. + +contains=ALL + If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all + groups will be accepted inside the item. + +contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},.. + If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all + groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that + are listed. Example: > + :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function + +contains=TOP + If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all + groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained" + argument. +contains=TOP,{group-name},.. + Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed. + +contains=CONTAINED + If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then + all groups will be accepted that have the "contained" + argument. +contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},.. + Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are + listed. + + +The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names +that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used). +The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: > + ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3] +The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups +that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax +command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting +syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because +the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the +group names. + +The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a +region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used +|:syn-matchgroup|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the +region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the +area that is highlighted + + +containedin={group-name}... *:syn-containedin* + +The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The +item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the +containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item. + +The {group-name}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above. + +This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to +be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition +of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading +the C syntax: > + :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained +Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top +level. + +Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can +appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that +keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't +work. + + +nextgroup={group-name},.. *:syn-nextgroup* + +The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names, +separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns). + +If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be +tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have +a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group +will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the +current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all +other groups. Example: > + :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo + :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller + :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained + +This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a +"Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for +highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. > + + Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf + fff bbb fff bbb + +Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar. +when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be +highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match +would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|). + + +skipwhite *:syn-skipwhite* +skipnl *:syn-skipnl* +skipempty *:syn-skipempty* + +These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be +used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text: + skipwhite skip over space and tab characters + skipnl skip over the end of a line + skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl") + +When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no +next group that matches the white space. + +When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next +line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current +line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after +the current item in the same line. + +When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other +groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried +for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white +space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items. + +Example: > + :syn match ifstart "\<if.*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty + :syn match ifline "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained + :syn match ifline "endif" contained +Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also +match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes +precedence. +Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add +"contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the +example). + +IMPLICIT CONCEAL *:syn-conceal-implicit* + +:sy[ntax] conceal [on|off] + This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords, + matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal + on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region" + defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal + off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be + given explicitly. + +:sy[ntax] conceal + Show either "syntax conceal on" or "syntax conceal off". + +============================================================================== +8. Syntax patterns *:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402* + +In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical +characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to +use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can +use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: > + :syntax region Comment start="/\*" end="\*/" + :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+ + +See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are +always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual +value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is +not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and +independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings. + +Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*". +This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere. + + *:syn-pattern-offset* +The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to +change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the +match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both +are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip +pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern. + +The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}" +The {what} can be one of seven strings: + +ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text +me Match End offset for the end of the matched text +hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts +he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends +rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts +re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends +lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern + +The {offset} can be: + +s start of the matched pattern +s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right +s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left +e end of the matched pattern +e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right +e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left +{nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars right of the start + +Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3". + +Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always +meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used: + + ms me hs he rs re lc ~ +match item yes yes yes yes - - yes +region item start yes - yes - yes - yes +region item skip - yes - - - - yes +region item end - yes - yes - yes yes + +Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: > + :syn match String /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1 +< + some "string" text + ^^^^^^ highlighted + +Notes: +- There must be no white space between the pattern and the character + offset(s). +- The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text. +- A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end + pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped. +- Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters. + This didn't work well for multibyte characters, so it was changed with the + Vim 7.2 release. +- The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern + matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting + start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e. + +Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): > + :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1 +< + /* this is a comment */ + ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted + +A more complicated Example: > + :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1 +< + abcfoostringbarabc + mmmmmmmmmmm match + sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar") + +Leading context *:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context* + +Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility +with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct +in the pattern. You can also often use |/\zs|. + +The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must +be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will +cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing +characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be +used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to +specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: > + + :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1 + :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1 + :syn match Underline "_\+" +< + ___zzzz ___wwww + ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline + ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash + ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash + +The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset, +unless you set "ms" explicitly. + + +Multi-line patterns *:syn-multi-line* + +The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as +expected, but there are a few exceptions. + +When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not +allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a +following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of +the match doesn't move to another line. + +The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will +continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is +matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line +halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a +previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern +is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: > + x x a + b x x +Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters +after the "\n". + + +External matches *:syn-ext-match* + +These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns: + + */\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* *E879* + \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it can be + accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable in + defining a syntax region start pattern. + + */\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5* + \z1 ... \z9 */\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67* + Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding + sub-expression in a previous start pattern match. + +Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common +sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix +shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression +items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be +referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document +example, for instance, can be done like this: > + :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$" + +As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern, +it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it +changes the \z1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the +first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can +also be used in skip patterns: > + :syn region foo start="start \z(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1" + +Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and +indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied +to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa". +Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references +within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one +sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest +the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)". + +Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches +cannot be referred to. + +============================================================================== +9. Syntax clusters *:syn-cluster* *E400* + +:sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..] + [add={group-name}..] + [remove={group-name}..] + +This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a +single name. + + contains={group-name}.. + The cluster is set to the specified list of groups. + add={group-name}.. + The specified groups are added to the cluster. + remove={group-name}.. + The specified groups are removed from the cluster. + +A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=.., +nextgroup=.., add=.. or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use +this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents. + +Example: > + :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers + :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2 + +As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively +retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so +to speak: > + :syntax keyword A aaa + :syntax keyword B bbb + :syntax cluster AandB contains=A + :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB + :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff + +This also has implications for nested clusters: > + :syntax keyword A aaa + :syntax keyword B bbb + :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B + :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup + :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup + :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup + :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff +< + *E848* +The maximum number of clusters is 9767. + +============================================================================== +10. Including syntax files *:syn-include* *E397* + +It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for +a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in +two different ways: + + - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be + allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use + the |:runtime| command: > + + " In cpp.vim: + :runtime! syntax/c.vim + :unlet b:current_syntax + +< - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be + contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the + ":syntax include" command: + +:sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name} + + All syntax items declared in the included file will have the + "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified, + all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to + that list. > + + " In perl.vim: + :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim + :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod +< + When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR" + or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path + (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'. + All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is + recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file + with their own version, without replacing the file that does the + ":syn include". + + *E847* +The maximum number of includes is 999. + +============================================================================== +11. Synchronizing *:syn-sync* *E403* *E404* + +Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To +make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where +redrawing starts. + +:sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...] + +There are four ways to synchronize: +1. Always parse from the start of the file. + |:syn-sync-first| +2. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can + figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment. + |:syn-sync-second| +3. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there. + |:syn-sync-third| +4. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on. + |:syn-sync-fourth| + + *:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines* +For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is +limited by "minlines" and "maxlines". + +If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least +that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few +lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing. + +If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched +for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after +adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a +slow machine. Example: > + :syntax sync maxlines=500 ccomment +< + *:syn-sync-linebreaks* +When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may +cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to +start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with +the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line +break use this: > + :syntax sync linebreaks=1 +The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a +change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the +value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks". + + +First syncing method: *:syn-sync-first* +> + :syntax sync fromstart + +The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting +accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text, +so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However, +when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst +case: to the end of the file). + +Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number. + + +Second syncing method: *:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment* + +For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given. +Example: > + :syntax sync ccomment + +When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style +comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be +used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"! +An alternate group name can be specified, for example: > + :syntax sync ccomment javaComment +This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be +used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that +region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/". + +The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of +lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of +lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few +lines, but it hard to sync on). + +Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used +that cross a line and contain a "*/". Since letting strings cross a line +is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the +chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction +is hardly ever noticed. + + +Third syncing method: *:syn-sync-third* + +For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given. +Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This +means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower. +Example: > + :syntax sync minlines=50 + +"lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions). + + +Fourth syncing method: *:syn-sync-fourth* + +The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a +sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some +region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search +starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there +the search continues backwards in the file. + +This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained +matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences: +- Keywords cannot be used. +- The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group + of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups. +- The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of + forwards. +- A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group + of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the + search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the + consecutive lines that contain the continuation pattern. +- When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or + group of continued lines). +- When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of + continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the + line (or group of continued lines). +- When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of + continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used. + This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region + (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used). + +There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used: +1. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the + search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected + to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions + that cross lines cannot contain other regions. +2. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group + that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified. + This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much + slower, because more text needs to be parsed. +Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time. + +Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to +avoid finding unwanted matches. + +[The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the +search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the +highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much) +faster.] + + *syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394* + :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" .. + + Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the + name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing + of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region + must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used. + "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match. + + *syn-sync-groupthere* + :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" .. + + Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that + is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync + point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync + pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting. + For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/". If + "/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the + "groupthere" is "cComment". If "*/" is found first, you know that you + are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice + it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear + inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...). + + :syntax sync match .. + :syntax sync region .. + + Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is + skipped while searching for a sync point. + + *syn-sync-linecont* + :syntax sync linecont {pattern} + + When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in + the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will + consider the lines to be concatenated. + +If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are +searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very +few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: > + :syntax sync maxlines=100 + +You can clear all sync settings with: > + :syntax sync clear + +You can clear specific sync patterns with: > + :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} .. + +============================================================================== +12. Listing syntax items *:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list* + +This command lists all the syntax items: > + + :sy[ntax] [list] + +To show the syntax items for one syntax group: > + + :sy[ntax] list {group-name} + +To list the syntax groups in one cluster: *E392* > + + :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name} + +See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command. + +Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn" +is mostly used, because it looks better. + +============================================================================== +13. Colorschemes *color-schemes* + +In the next section you can find information about individual highlight groups +and how to specify colors for them. Most likely you want to just select a set +of colors by using the `:colorscheme` command, for example: > + + colorscheme pablo +< + *:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185* +:colo[rscheme] Output the name of the currently active color scheme. + This is basically the same as > + :echo g:colors_name +< In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will + output "default". When compiled without the |+eval| + feature it will output "unknown". + +:colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath' + for the file "colors/{name}.vim". The first one that + is found is loaded. + Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below + "start" and then under "opt". + + Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use + ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script. + +You have two options for customizing a color scheme. For changing the +appearance of specific colors, you can redefine a color name before loading +the scheme. The desert scheme uses the khaki color for the cursor. To use a +darker variation of the same color: > + + let v:colornames['khaki'] = '#bdb76b' + colorscheme desert +< +For further customization, such as changing |:highlight-link| associations, +use another name, e.g. "~/.vim/colors/mine.vim", and use `:runtime` to load +the original color scheme: > + runtime colors/evening.vim + hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue + +Before the color scheme will be loaded all default color list scripts +(`colors/lists/default.vim`) will be executed and then the |ColorSchemePre| +autocommand event is triggered. After the color scheme has been loaded the +|ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered. + + *colorscheme-override* +If a color scheme is almost right, you can add modifications on top of it by +using the |ColorScheme| autocommand. For example, to remove the background +color (can make it transparent in some terminals): > + augroup my_colorschemes + au! + au Colorscheme pablo hi Normal ctermbg=NONE + augroup END + +Change a couple more colors: > + augroup my_colorschemes + au! + au Colorscheme pablo hi Normal ctermbg=NONE + \ | highlight Special ctermfg=63 + \ | highlight Identifier ctermfg=44 + augroup END + +If you make a lot of changes it might be better to copy the distributed +colorscheme to your home directory and change it: > + :!cp $VIMRUNTIME/colors/pablo.vim ~/.vim/colors + :edit ~/.vim/colors/pablo.vim + +With Vim 9.0 the collection of color schemes was updated and made work in many +different terminals. One change was to often define the Normal highlight +group to make sure the colors work well. In case you prefer the old version, +you can find them here: +https://github.com/vim/colorschemes/blob/master/legacy_colors/ + +For info about writing a color scheme file: > + :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt + + +============================================================================== +14. Highlight command *:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415* + +There are three types of highlight groups: +- The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the + name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are + linked to a group of the second type. +- The ones used for all syntax languages. +- The ones used for the 'highlight' option. + *hitest.vim* +You can see all the groups currently active with this command: > + :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim +This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed +in their own color. + +:hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have + attributes set. + +:hi[ghlight] {group-name} + List one highlight group. + + *highlight-clear* *:hi-clear* +:hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all + highlighting for groups added by the user. + Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which + default colors to use. + If there was a default link, restore it. |:hi-link| + +:hi[ghlight] clear {group-name} +:hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE + Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It + is _not_ set back to the default colors. + +:hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} .. + Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for + an existing group. If a given color name is not + recognized, each `colors/lists/default.vim` found on + |'runtimepath'| will be loaded. + See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments. + See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default] + argument. + +Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the +default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional +highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default +values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to +the default value. + +A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command. This loads +a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: > + + :hi Comment gui=bold + +Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the +specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the +result is like this single command has been used: > + :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold +< + *:highlight-verbose* +When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will +also tell where it was last set. Example: > + :verbose hi Comment +< Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~ + Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~ + +When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be +mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information. + + *highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423* +There are three types of terminals for highlighting: +term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm) +cterm a color terminal (MS-Windows console, color-xterm, these have the "Co" + termcap entry) +gui the GUI + +For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use +the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting. + +1. highlight arguments for normal terminals + + *bold* *underline* *undercurl* + *underdouble* *underdotted* + *underdashed* *inverse* *italic* + *standout* *nocombine* *strikethrough* +term={attr-list} *attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418* + attr-list is a comma-separated list (without spaces) of the + following items (in any order): + bold + underline + undercurl not always available + underdouble not always available + underdotted not always available + underdashed not always available + strikethrough not always available + reverse + inverse same as reverse + italic + standout + nocombine override attributes instead of combining them + NONE no attributes used (used to reset it) + + Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They + have the same effect. + *underline-codes* + "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible + then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough" + are only available in the GUI and some terminals. The color is set + with |highlight-guisp| or |highlight-ctermul|. You can try these + termcap entries to make undercurl work in a terminal: > + let &t_Cs = "\e[4:3m" + let &t_Ce = "\e[4:0m" + +< "underdouble" is a double underline, "underdotted" is a dotted + underline and "underdashed" is a dashed underline. These are only + supported by some terminals. If your terminal supports them you may + have to specify the codes like this: > + let &t_Us = "\e[4:2m" + let &t_ds = "\e[4:4m" + let &t_Ds = "\e[4:5m" +< They are reset with |t_Ce|, the same as curly underline (undercurl). + When t_Us, t_ds or t_Ds is not set then underline will be used as a + fallback. + + +start={term-list} *highlight-start* *E422* +stop={term-list} *term-list* *highlight-stop* + These lists of terminal codes can be used to get + non-standard attributes on a terminal. + + The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument + is written before the characters in the highlighted + area. It can be anything that you want to send to the + terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence + specified with the "stop" argument is written after the + highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument. + Otherwise the screen will look messed up. + + The {term-list} can have two forms: + + 1. A string with escape sequences. + This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with + "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized + here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example: + start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r; + + 2. A list of terminal codes. + Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of + the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas. + White space is not allowed. Example: + start=t_C1,t_BL + The terminal codes must exist for this to work. + + +2. highlight arguments for color terminals + +cterm={attr-list} *highlight-cterm* + See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|. + The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when + colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could + be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue. + Note: Some terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes + with coloring. To be portable, use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg=" + OR "ctermbg=". + +ctermfg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermfg* *E421* +ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg* +ctermul={color-nr} *highlight-ctermul* + These give the foreground (ctermfg), background (ctermbg) and + underline (ctermul) color to use in the terminal. + + The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to + (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co". + The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal + and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of + "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives + another color, on others you just get color 3. + + For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit + unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The + colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file. + Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors + for each user. See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms. + *tmux* + When using tmux you may want to use this in the tmux config: > + # tmux colors + set -s default-terminal "tmux-256color" + set -as terminal-overrides ",*-256color:Tc" +< More info at: + https://github.com/tmux/tmux/wiki/FAQ#how-do-i-use-a-256-colour-terminal + https://github.com/tmux/tmux/wiki/FAQ#how-do-i-use-rgb-colour + + The MS-Windows standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so + these have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in + X11 are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the + highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The + following names are recognized, with the color number used: + + *cterm-colors* + NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~ + 0 0 Black + 1 4 DarkBlue + 2 2 DarkGreen + 3 6 DarkCyan + 4 1 DarkRed + 5 5 DarkMagenta + 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow + 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey + 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey + 9 4* Blue, LightBlue + 10 2* Green, LightGreen + 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan + 12 1* Red, LightRed + 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta + 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow + 15 7* White + + The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co' + greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for + 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '*' indicates that the + bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g., + "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work + for background colors! Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed. + If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a + "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use + a number instead of a color name. + + The case of the color names is ignored. + Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the + numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '*' means 'add 8' so that + Blue is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc. + + Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong + colors! + + You can also use "NONE" to remove the color. + + *:hi-normal-cterm* + When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group, + these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text. + Example: > + :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue +< When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the + 'background' option will be adjusted automatically, under the + condition that the color is recognized and 'background' was not set + explicitly. This causes the highlight groups that depend on + 'background' to change! This means you should set the colors for + Normal first, before setting other colors. + When a color scheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to + be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First + delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this. + + When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim + needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op" + termcap entry |t_op|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the + 't_op' option in your .vimrc. + *E419* *E420* *E453* + When Vim knows the normal foreground, background and underline colors, + "fg", "bg" and "ul" can be used as color names. This only works after + setting the colors for the Normal group and for the MS-Windows + console. Example, for reverse video: > + :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg +< Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this + command is given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the + "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted. + + +3. highlight arguments for the GUI + +gui={attr-list} *highlight-gui* + These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode. + See |attr-list| for a description. + Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They + have the same effect. + Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group. + +font={font-name} *highlight-font* + font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim + runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: > + font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1 +< + The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font. + When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default + font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is + used). + The following only works with Motif, not with other GUIs: + When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed. + When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be + changed. + All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same + character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will + occur. + To use a font name with an embedded space or other special character, + put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then. + Example: > + :hi comment font='Monospace 10' + +guifg={color-name} *highlight-guifg* +guibg={color-name} *highlight-guibg* +guisp={color-name} *highlight-guisp* + These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special + (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl and + strikethrough. + There are a few special names: + NONE no color (transparent) *E1361* + bg use normal background color + background use normal background color + fg use normal foreground color + foreground use normal foreground color + To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character, + put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then. + Example: > + :hi comment guifg='salmon pink' +< + *gui-colors* + Suggested color names (these are available on most systems): + Red LightRed DarkRed + Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen + Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue + Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan + Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta + Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow + Gray LightGray DarkGray + Black White + Orange Purple Violet + + In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See + |win32-colors|. + + You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values. + The format is "#rrggbb", where + "rr" is the Red value + "gg" is the Green value + "bb" is the Blue value + All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: > + :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff +< + If you are authoring a color scheme and use the same hexadecimal value + repeatedly, you can define a name for it in |v:colornames|. For + example: > + + # provide a default value for this color but allow the user to + # override it. + :call extend(v:colornames, {'alt_turquoise': '#11f0c3'}, 'keep') + :highlight Comment guifg=alt_turquoise guibg=magenta +< + If you are using a color scheme that relies on named colors and you + would like to adjust the precise appearance of those colors, you can + do so by overriding the values in |v:colornames| prior to loading the + scheme: > + + let v:colornames['alt_turquoise'] = '#22f0d3' + colorscheme alt +< + If you want to develop a color list that can be relied on by others, + it is best to prefix your color names. By convention these color lists + are placed in the colors/lists directory. You can see an example in + '$VIMRUNTIME/colors/lists/csscolors.vim'. This list would be sourced + by a color scheme using: > + + :runtime colors/lists/csscolors.vim + :highlight Comment guifg=css_turquoise +< + + *highlight-groups* *highlight-default* +These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the +'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value +of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight" +command. +When possible the name is highlighted in the used colors. If this makes it +unreadable use Visual selection. + + *hl-ColorColumn* +ColorColumn Used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn'. + *hl-Conceal* +Conceal Placeholder characters substituted for concealed + text (see 'conceallevel'). + *hl-Cursor* *hl-lCursor* +Cursor Character under the cursor. +lCursor Character under the cursor when |language-mapping| + is used (see 'guicursor'). + *hl-CursorIM* +CursorIM Like Cursor, but used when in IME mode. |CursorIM| + *hl-CursorColumn* +CursorColumn Screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is set. + *hl-CursorLine* +CursorLine Screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is set. + *hl-Directory* +Directory Directory names (and other special names in listings). + *hl-DiffAdd* +DiffAdd Diff mode: Added line. |diff.txt| + *hl-DiffChange* +DiffChange Diff mode: Changed line. |diff.txt| + *hl-DiffDelete* +DiffDelete Diff mode: Deleted line. |diff.txt| + *hl-DiffText* +DiffText Diff mode: Changed text within a changed line. |diff.txt| + *hl-EndOfBuffer* +EndOfBuffer Filler lines (~) after the last line in the buffer. + By default, this is highlighted like |hl-NonText|. + *hl-ErrorMsg* +ErrorMsg Error messages on the command line. + *hl-VertSplit* +VertSplit Column separating vertically split windows. + *hl-Folded* +Folded Line used for closed folds. + *hl-FoldColumn* +FoldColumn 'foldcolumn' + *hl-SignColumn* +SignColumn Column where |signs| are displayed. + *hl-IncSearch* +IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with + ":s///c". + *hl-LineNr* +LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number' + or 'relativenumber' option is set. + *hl-LineNrAbove* +LineNrAbove Line number for when the 'relativenumber' + option is set, above the cursor line. + *hl-LineNrBelow* +LineNrBelow Line number for when the 'relativenumber' + option is set, below the cursor line. + *hl-CursorLineNr* +CursorLineNr Like LineNr when 'cursorline' is set and 'cursorlineopt' + contains "number" or is "both", for the cursor line. + *hl-CursorLineFold* +CursorLineFold Like FoldColumn when 'cursorline' is set for the cursor line. + *hl-CursorLineSign* +CursorLineSign Like SignColumn when 'cursorline' is set for the cursor line. + *hl-MatchParen* +MatchParen Character under the cursor or just before it, if it + is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt| + *hl-MessageWindow* +MessageWindow Messages popup window used by `:echowindow`. If not defined + |hl-WarningMsg| is used. + *hl-ModeMsg* +ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --"). + *hl-MoreMsg* +MoreMsg |more-prompt| + *hl-NonText* +NonText '@' at the end of the window, "<<<" at the start of the window + for 'smoothscroll', characters from 'showbreak' and other + characters that do not really exist in the text, such as the + ">" displayed when a double-wide character doesn't fit at the + end of the line. + *hl-Normal* +Normal Normal text. + *hl-Pmenu* +Pmenu Popup menu: Normal item. + *hl-PmenuSel* +PmenuSel Popup menu: Selected item. + *hl-PmenuKind* +PmenuKind Popup menu: Normal item "kind". + *hl-PmenuKindSel* +PmenuKindSel Popup menu: Selected item "kind". + *hl-PmenuExtra* +PmenuExtra Popup menu: Normal item "extra text". + *hl-PmenuExtraSel* +PmenuExtraSel Popup menu: Selected item "extra text". + *hl-PmenuSbar* +PmenuSbar Popup menu: Scrollbar. + *hl-PmenuThumb* +PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar. + *hl-PopupNotification* +PopupNotification + Popup window created with |popup_notification()|. If not + defined |hl-WarningMsg| is used. + *hl-Question* +Question |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions. + *hl-QuickFixLine* +QuickFixLine Current |quickfix| item in the quickfix window. + *hl-Search* +Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch'). + Also used for similar items that need to stand out. + *hl-CurSearch* +CurSearch Current match for the last search pattern (see 'hlsearch'). + Note: This is correct after a search, but may get outdated if + changes are made or the screen is redrawn. + *hl-SpecialKey* +SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used + to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'. + Generally: Text that is displayed differently from what it + really is. + *hl-SpellBad* +SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell| + This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. + *hl-SpellCap* +SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. |spell| + This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. + *hl-SpellLocal* +SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is + used in another region. |spell| + This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. + *hl-SpellRare* +SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is + hardly ever used. |spell| + This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. + *hl-StatusLine* +StatusLine Status line of current window. + *hl-StatusLineNC* +StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows + Note: If this is equal to "StatusLine", Vim will use "^^^" in + the status line of the current window. + *hl-StatusLineTerm* +StatusLineTerm Status line of current window, if it is a |terminal| window. + *hl-StatusLineTermNC* +StatusLineTermNC Status lines of not-current windows that is a + |terminal| window. + *hl-TabLine* +TabLine Tab pages line, not active tab page label. + *hl-TabLineFill* +TabLineFill Tab pages line, where there are no labels. + *hl-TabLineSel* +TabLineSel Tab pages line, active tab page label. + *hl-Terminal* +Terminal |terminal| window (see |terminal-size-color|). + *hl-Title* +Title Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc. + *hl-Visual* +Visual Visual mode selection. + *hl-VisualNOS* +VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection". + Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this. + *hl-WarningMsg* +WarningMsg Warning messages. + *hl-WildMenu* +WildMenu Current match in 'wildmenu' completion. + + *hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9* +The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the +statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9. + +For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu, +scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the +Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg, +and guifg. + + *hl-Menu* +Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus. + Also used for the toolbar. + Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg. + + NOTE: For Motif the font argument actually + specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is + empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when + set. + + *hl-Scrollbar* +Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's + scrollbars. + Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg. + + *hl-Tooltip* +Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips. + Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg. + + NOTE: For Motif the font argument actually + specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is + empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when + set. + +============================================================================== +15. Linking groups *:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413* + +When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you +can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight +group, and give the color attributes only for that group. + +To set a link: + + :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group} + +To remove a link: + + :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE + +Notes: *E414* +- If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You + don't get an error message for a non-existing group. +- As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is + removed. +- If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is + not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a + sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip + links for groups that already have settings. + + *:hi-default* *:highlight-default* +The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a +group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command +will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link. + +Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a +specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: > + :highlight default link cComment Comment +If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: > + :highlight link cComment Question +Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be +overruled when the syntax file is loaded. + +To have a link survive `:highlight clear`, which is useful if you have +highlighting for a specific filetype and you want to keep it when selecting +another color scheme, put a command like this in the +"after/syntax/{filetype}.vim" file: > + highlight! default link cComment Question + +============================================================================== +16. Cleaning up *:syn-clear* *E391* + +If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this +command: > + :syntax clear + +This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting, +or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed +in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that +load the syntax file. +The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is +loaded after this command. + +To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: > + :syntax clear {group-name} .. +This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}. + +To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: > + :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} .. +This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list. + + *:syntax-off* *:syn-off* +If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove +the autocommands that load the syntax files: > + :syntax off + +What this command actually does, is executing the command > + :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim +See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work +$VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See |$VIMRUNTIME|. + + *:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset* +If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the +defaults back: > + + :syntax reset + +It is a bit of a wrong name, since it does not reset any syntax items, it only +affects the highlighting. + +This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option. + +Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset +back to their Vim default. +Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color +scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost. + +What this actually does is: > + + let g:syntax_cmd = "reset" + runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim + +Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option. + + *syncolor* +If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim +script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in +'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule +the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax +reset" command. + +For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: > + + if &background == "light" + highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen + else + highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green + endif +< + *E679* +Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the +'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an +endless loop. + +Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether +your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This +depends on the color scheme file. See |:colorscheme|. + + *syntax_cmd* +The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the +syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded: + "on" `:syntax on` command. Highlight colors are overruled but + links are kept + "enable" `:syntax enable` command. Only define colors for groups that + don't have highlighting yet. Use `:highlight default` . + "reset" `:syntax reset` command or loading a color scheme. Define all + the colors. + "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a + syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set + them. + +============================================================================== +17. Highlighting tags *tag-highlight* + +If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following +mappings. + + <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags. + <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file. +> + :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]*:\)\=\([^ ]*\).*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12> + :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR> + +WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more +memory Vim will consume. + +Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you +must use Universal Ctags (found at https://ctags.io) or Exuberant ctags (found +at http://ctags.sf.net). + +Put these lines in your Makefile: + +# Make a highlight file for types. Requires Universal/Exuberant ctags and awk +types: types.vim +types.vim: *.[ch] + ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\ + awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\ + {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@ + +And put these lines in your .vimrc: > + + " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists + autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') .. '/types.vim' + autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname) + autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] exe 'so ' .. fname + autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif + +============================================================================== +18. Window-local syntax *:ownsyntax* + +Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is +possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own +private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source +with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source +highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold, +italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here. + +To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other +windows on the buffer: > + :ownsyntax foo +< *w:current_syntax* +This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo". The value of +"b:current_syntax" does not change. This is implemented by saving and +restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set +"b:current_syntax". The value set by the syntax file is assigned to +"w:current_syntax". +Note: This resets the 'spell', 'spellcapcheck' and 'spellfile' options. + +Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows +on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely, +syntax commands executed from that window do not affect other windows on the +same buffer. + +A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer +is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded. +When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax. + +============================================================================== +19. Color xterms *xterm-color* *color-xterm* + +Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the +default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: > + :if &term =~ "xterm" + : if has("terminfo") + : set t_Co=8 + : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm + : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm + : else + : set t_Co=8 + : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm + : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm + : endif + :endif +< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] + +You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal, +e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm". + +Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may +be wrong. + *xiterm* *rxvt* +The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too. +But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: > + :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm + :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm +< + *colortest.vim* +To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution. +To use it, execute this command: > + :runtime syntax/colortest.vim + +Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can +output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined +at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground +colors, when 't_Co' is 8. + + *xfree-xterm* +To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be +included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version +at: > + http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html +Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the +termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it +supports. > + ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query +If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings. +(Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding). + +This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): > + :if has("terminfo") + : set t_Co=16 + : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm + : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm + :else + : set t_Co=16 + : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm + : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm + :endif +< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] + +Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically +translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm". +Colors above 16 are also translated automatically. + +For 256 colors this has been reported to work: > + + :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm + :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm + +Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color" +and try if that works. + +You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file): + XTerm*color0: #000000 + XTerm*color1: #c00000 + XTerm*color2: #008000 + XTerm*color3: #808000 + XTerm*color4: #0000c0 + XTerm*color5: #c000c0 + XTerm*color6: #008080 + XTerm*color7: #c0c0c0 + XTerm*color8: #808080 + XTerm*color9: #ff6060 + XTerm*color10: #00ff00 + XTerm*color11: #ffff00 + XTerm*color12: #8080ff + XTerm*color13: #ff40ff + XTerm*color14: #00ffff + XTerm*color15: #ffffff + Xterm*cursorColor: Black + +[Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the +cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a +newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.] + +To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database +Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): > + xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults +< + *xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor* +To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas +Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with +these resources: + XTerm*cursorBlink: on + XTerm*cursorOnTime: 400 + XTerm*cursorOffTime: 250 + XTerm*cursorColor: White + + *hpterm-color* +These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8 +foreground colors: > + :if has("terminfo") + : set t_Co=8 + : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS + : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S + :else + : set t_Co=8 + : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS + : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S + :endif +< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] + + *Eterm* *enlightened-terminal* +These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal +emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the +bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. > + :set t_Co=16 + :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m + :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m +< + *TTpro-telnet* +These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware / +open-source program for MS-Windows. > + set t_Co=16 + set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm + set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm +Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure +that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled. +(info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>) + + +============================================================================== +20. When syntax is slow *:syntime* + +This is aimed at authors of a syntax file. + +If your syntax causes redrawing to be slow, here are a few hints on making it +faster. To see slowness switch on some features that usually interfere, such +as 'relativenumber' and |folding|. + +Note: This is only available when compiled with the |+profile| feature. +You many need to build Vim with "huge" features. + +To find out what patterns are consuming most time, get an overview with this +sequence: > + :syntime on + [ redraw the text at least once with CTRL-L ] + :syntime report + +This will display a list of syntax patterns that were used, sorted by the time +it took to match them against the text. + +:syntime on Start measuring syntax times. This will add some + overhead to compute the time spent on syntax pattern + matching. + +:syntime off Stop measuring syntax times. + +:syntime clear Set all the counters to zero, restart measuring. + +:syntime report Show the syntax items used since ":syntime on" in the + current window. Use a wider display to see more of + the output. + + The list is sorted by total time. The columns are: + TOTAL Total time in seconds spent on + matching this pattern. + COUNT Number of times the pattern was used. + MATCH Number of times the pattern actually + matched + SLOWEST The longest time for one try. + AVERAGE The average time for one try. + NAME Name of the syntax item. Note that + this is not unique. + PATTERN The pattern being used. + +Pattern matching gets slow when it has to try many alternatives. Try to +include as much literal text as possible to reduce the number of ways a +pattern does NOT match. + +When using the "\@<=" and "\@<!" items, add a maximum size to avoid trying at +all positions in the current and previous line. For example, if the item is +literal text specify the size of that text (in bytes): + +"<\@<=span" Matches "span" in "<span". This tries matching with "<" in + many places. +"<\@1<=span" Matches the same, but only tries one byte before "span". + + + vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: